TM Transmission GTR Store PDF

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE
TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION

SECTION TM B
TM
E
CONTENTS
TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) ............................ 41 F
CONSULT-III Function (GT-R certified NISSAN
BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 6 dealer) .....................................................................41
eu
G
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ......... 6 COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 57
Work Flow (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .............. 6
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 57
e.
Diagnostic Work Sheet (GT-R certified NISSAN
dealer) ....................................................................... 7 Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ...........57 H
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............57
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ..................... 8
r
to
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN
dealer) .....................................................................57 I
TCM REPLACEMENT ................................................. 8
r-s
TCM REPLACEMENT : Description ......................... 8 P0700 TCM ........................................................ 58

TCM REPLACEMENT : Special Repair Require- Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ...........58
ment .......................................................................... 8 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............58 J
t
.g
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT ........ 9 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN

dealer) .....................................................................60
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT :
w
Description ................................................................ 9 K
P0705 RANGE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY .... 62
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT :
w
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ...........62

Special Repair Requirement ..................................... 9 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............62
L
w
MAINTENANCE ......................................................... 11 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN

MAINTENANCE : Description ................................. 12 dealer) .....................................................................63
MAINTENANCE : Special Repair Requirement ...... 12 Component Inspection (Park Position Switch)
(GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ..............................67 M
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS .............................. 14
P0706 RANGE SENSOR .................................. 68
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM .................................14 Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ...........68
N
Structure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .............. 14 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............68
Shift Mechanism (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer).... 16 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN
Operation Status and Control (GT-R certified NIS- dealer) .....................................................................68
SAN dealer) ............................................................. 19 Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) O
Main Device (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 19 (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ..............................72
Oil Pressure System (GT-R certified NISSAN
dealer) ..................................................................... 27
P0710 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ........ 73 P
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ...........73
TCM System (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ........ 27
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............73
Component Parts Location (GT-R certified NIS-
SAN dealer) ............................................................. 38 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN
dealer) .....................................................................73
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ......40 Component Inspection (Fluid Temperature Sen-
Diagnosis Description (GT-R certified NISSAN sor) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......................75
dealer) ..................................................................... 40
TM-1
P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 129
FUNCTION ......................................................... 76 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 129
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ........... 76 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............ 76 dealer) ................................................................... 130
dealer) .................................................................... 76
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 1 ................. 132
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 132
Component Inspection (Fluid Temperature Sen-
sor) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ...................... 78 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 132
P0715 CLUTCH A SPEED SENSOR ................ 79 dealer) ................................................................... 132
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ........... 79 Component Inspection (Shift Solenoid Valve 1)
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............ 79 (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............................ 134
dealer) .................................................................... 80
P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 2 ................. 135
P0720 OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR ....... 82 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 135
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ........... 82 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN Component Inspection (Shift Solenoid Valve 2)
dealer) .................................................................... 84 (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............................ 137
P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ...................... 87 P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 3 ................. 138
eu
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ........... 87 Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 138
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............ 87 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 138
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN
dealer) .................................................................... 88
P0729 SLEEVE A1 FUNCTION ......................... 91

e.
dealer) ................................................................... 138
Component Inspection (Shift Solenoid Valve 3)
r
(GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............................ 140
to
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ........... 91
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............ 91 P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 4 ................. 141
r-s
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 141
dealer) .................................................................... 96 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 141
t
P0731 SLEEVE B1 FUNCTION ......................... 99

.g
dealer) ................................................................... 141

Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ........... 99 Component Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN
w

P0770 SEQUENCE SOLENOID VALVE .......... 144
w
dealer) ...................................................................104
P0732 SLEEVE A2 FUNCTION ....................... 108
w
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 144

Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ..........108 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ...........108 dealer) ................................................................... 145
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN Component Inspection (Sequence Solenoid
dealer) ...................................................................114 Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ................. 146
P0733 SLEEVE B2 FUNCTION ....................... 117 P0775 CLUTCH B SOLENOID VALVE ............ 147
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ..........117 Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 147
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ...........117 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 147
dealer) ...................................................................123 dealer) ................................................................... 147
Component Inspection (Clutch B Solenoid Valve)
P0745 CLUTCH A SOLENOID VALVE ........... 126 (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............................ 149
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ..........126
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ...........126 P0776 CLUTCH B SOLENOID VALVE FUNC-
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN TION .................................................................. 150
dealer) ...................................................................126 Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 150
Component Inspection (Clutch A Solenoid Valve) DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 150
(GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............................128 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN
dealer) ................................................................... 151
P0746 CLUTCH A SOLENOID VALVE FUNC-
TION ................................................................. 129 P0790 SET-UP SWITCH (TRANSMISSION) .. 153
TM-2
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 153 Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 175
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 153 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 175 A
dealer) ................................................................... 153 dealer) ................................................................... 175
Component Inspection [Set-up Switch (Transmis- B
sion)] (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .................. 154 P2713 AXIS B FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE ............................................................. 176
P0795 AXIS A FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 176
VALVE .............................................................. 155 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 176 C
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 155 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 155 dealer) ................................................................... 176
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN Component Inspection (Axis B Feed Pressure So- TM
dealer) ................................................................... 155 lenoid Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ....... 178
Component Inspection (Axis A Feed Pressure So-
lenoid Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ...... 157 P2714 AXIS B FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE FUNCTION ......................................... 179 E
P0797 AXIS A FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 179
VALVE FUNCTION .......................................... 158 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 179
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 158 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN F
dealer) ................................................................... 158 P2722 LUBRICATING FLOW SOLENOID
eu
G
VALVE ............................................................. 181
P0827, P0828 AUTO/MANUAL RANGE Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 181
CHANGE SWITCH ........................................... 160
e.
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 160 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN H
r
dealer) ................................................................... 181
to
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN Component Inspection (Lubricating Flow Solenoid
dealer) ................................................................... 160 Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ................. 183 I
r-s
Component Inspection (Auto/Manual Range

Change Switch) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .. 162 P2731 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE . 184
P0840 CLUTCH A PRESSURE SENSOR ....... 163 J
t
.g
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 163 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN
w
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN Component Inspection (Line Pressure Solenoid K
dealer) ................................................................... 164 Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ................. 186
w
P0845 CLUTCH B PRESSURE SENSOR ....... 166 P2765 CLUTCH B SPEED SENSOR .............. 187 L
w
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 166 Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 187
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 166 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 187
dealer) ................................................................... 167 dealer) ................................................................... 188 M
P0872, P0873 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR ..... 169 P2776 PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-UP
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 169 SWITCH) ......................................................... 190 N
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 169 Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 190
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 190
dealer) ................................................................... 169 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN
O
dealer) ................................................................... 190
P0882 TCM POWER SUPPLY ......................... 172 Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 172 Switch)] (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............... 191
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 172 P
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN P2780 PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-DOWN
dealer) ................................................................... 172 SWITCH) ......................................................... 192
Component Inspection (TCM Relay) (GT-R certi- Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ......... 192
fied NISSAN dealer) .............................................. 174 DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 192
P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION dealer) ................................................................... 192
SIGNAL ............................................................ 175
TM-3
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift- Commercial Service Tools (GT-R certified NIS-
down Switch)] (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .....193 SAN dealer) .......................................................... 263
MAIN POWER SUPPLY .................................. 194 ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................. 265

Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN TRANSMISSION OIL ........................................ 265
dealer) ...................................................................194 Inspection .............................................................. 265
Draining ................................................................. 266
SET-UP SWITCH (TRANSMISSION) .............. 197 Filling ..................................................................... 266
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN SHIFT POSITION .............................................. 268
dealer) ...................................................................197 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 268
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT ........ 199 FLY WHEEL HOUSING ASSEMBLY ............... 269
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ..........199 Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 269
dealer) ...................................................................199 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .............................. 270
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .................................... 200 TCM .................................................................. 270

Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ..........200 Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ... 270
Component Function Check (GT-R certified NIS- Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN
SAN dealer) ...........................................................200 dealer) ................................................................... 270
eu
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN CONTROL DEVICE .......................................... 272
dealer) ...................................................................200
Exploded View ...................................................... 272
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) (GT-R
Removal and Installation ....................................... 272
certified NISSAN dealer) .......................................204
ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 205 e.

Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 273
Inspection .............................................................. 274
r
to
TCM .................................................................. 205 CONTROL CABLE ........................................... 275
Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ... 275
r-s
Reference Value (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)..205

Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN
Wiring Diagram - TRANSMISSION CONTROL
dealer) ................................................................... 275
SYSTEM - (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ...........222
Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 276
t
Fail Safe (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .............230

.g
DTC Inspection Priority Chart (GT-R certified NIS- PADDLE SHIFTER ........................................... 277
SAN dealer) ...........................................................232 Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ... 277
w
DTC Index .............................................................233 Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN

w
dealer) ................................................................... 277

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 235
OIL PAN ............................................................ 279
w
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM ........... 235

Exploded View ...................................................... 279
Symptom Table (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ..235
Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN
PRECAUTION ............................................ 257 dealer) ................................................................... 279
Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 280
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 257
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System PARK POSITION SWITCH ............................... 281
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ... 281
SIONER" ................................................................257 Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN
Aluminum Die-Casting Parts Handling ..................257 dealer) ................................................................... 281
General Precautions ..............................................258 Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 282
Precautions for Replacement of TCM and Trans- HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM ......................... 283
mission Assembly ..................................................258
Precautions Before Performing Diagnosis .............258 HEAT EXCHANGER PIPING .................................. 283
HEAT EXCHANGER PIPING : Exploded View
PREPARATION .......................................... 263 (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............................ 283
HEAT EXCHANGER PIPING : Removal and In-
PREPARATION ............................................... 263
stallation (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............. 283
Special Service Tools (GT-R certified NISSAN
HEAT EXCHANGER PIPING : Inspection (GT-R
dealer) ...................................................................263
certified NISSAN dealer) ....................................... 284
TM-4
HEAT EXCHANGER ............................................... 285 Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN
HEAT EXCHANGER : Exploded View (GT-R cer- dealer) ................................................................... 293 A
tified NISSAN dealer) ............................................ 285
HEAT EXCHANGER : Removal and Installation DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ............ 297
(GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............................ 285 B
HEAT EXCHANGER : Inspection (GT-R certified
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ........................ 297
Exploded View ....................................................... 297
NISSAN dealer) ..................................................... 287
Disassembly and assembly (GT-R certified NIS-
FRONT OIL SEAL ............................................ 288 SAN dealer) ........................................................... 297 C
Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .. 288
Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
dealer) ................................................................... 288 (SDS) .......................................................... 299 TM
Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ........... 290
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 291 (SDS) ............................................................... 299
General Specification ............................................ 299 E
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ......................... 291 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs
Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .. 291 (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ............................ 300
Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN Solenoid Valve (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .. 300 F
dealer) ................................................................... 291 Fluid Temperature Sensor (GT-R certified NIS-
Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ........... 292 SAN dealer) ........................................................... 300
Flywheel Housing Assembly (GT-R certified NIS-
eu
FLY WHEEL HOUSING ASSEMBLY .............. 293 G
SAN dealer) ........................................................... 300
Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .. 293
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-5
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019816
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM

1. Refer to TM-7, "Diagnostic Work Sheet (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)" and interview the customer to
obtain as much malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as
possible when the customer brings the vehicle in.
2. Check the following:
- Service history
- Refer to TM-258, "Precautions Before Performing Diagnosis".
- Harnesses and connectors malfunction. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists.
2. If DTC exists, perform the following operations.
- Record the DTC and freeze frame data. (Print out using CONSULT-III)
eu
- Erase DTCs.
- Check that the root cause clarified with DTC and malfunction information described by the customer. TM-
e.
235, "Symptom Table (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)" is effective.
3. Check the information of related TB (Technical Bulletin) and others also.
r
Do malfunction information and/or DTC exist?
to
Malfunction information and DTC exist.>>GO TO 3.
Malfunction information exists but no DTC.>>GO TO 4.
r-s
No malfunction information, but DTC exists.>>GO TO 5.

3.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
t
Check any malfunctions described by the customer, except the transmission warning lamp illuminated or
.g
blinking, on the vehicle.

Also inspect whether the symptom is a fail safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-230, "Fail Safe (GT-R certi-
w
fied NISSAN dealer)".

When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the “Diagnostic Work Sheet” is effective. Refer to TM-7, "Diag-
w
nostic Work Sheet (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".

Check the causal relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by
w
the customer occurs.
>> GO TO 5.
4.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle.
Also whether the symptom is a fail safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-230, "Fail Safe (GT-R certified NIS-
SAN dealer)".
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the “Diagnostic Work Sheet” is effective. Refer to TM-7, "Diag-
nostic Work Sheet (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
Check the causal relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by
the customer occurs.
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” for the applicable DTC to check if DTC is detected again.
Refer to TM-232, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)" if multiple DTCs are
detected, and then judge the order for performing the diagnosis.
NOTE:
TM-6
If no DTC is detected, refer to the freeze frame data.
Is any DTC detected? A
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check according to XX-XX, "*****".
6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM” B
Use TM-235, "Symptom Table (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)" from the symptom inspection result in step 4.
Then identify procedure to perform the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
C
>> GO TO 8.
7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS TM
Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts.
Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary.
E
>> GO TO 8.
8.FINAL CHECK F
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to check that the repair is correctly performed.
Check that malfunctions obtained from the customer are not reproduced, referring to the symptom inspection
result in step 3 or 4.
eu
G
Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced?
YES-1 >> DTC is reproduced: GO TO 5.
YES-2 >> Malfunction symptom is reproduced: GO TO 6.
NO
e.
>> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, check that DTC is erased.
r H
to
Diagnostic Work Sheet (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019817
I
r-s
Description
There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction
of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions prop- J
t
erly, a quick and exact diagnosis can be performed.

.g
In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. There-

fore, it is important to understand the symptom and status well
w
K
enough by interviewing the customer about the concerns carefully.
In order to systemize all the information for the diagnosis, prepare
w
the interview sheet referring to the interview points.

In some cases, multiple conditions that appear simultaneously make L
w
the transmission warning light blink, which causes a DTC to be

detected.
SEF907L
TM-7
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
TCM REPLACEMENT
TCM REPLACEMENT : Description INFOID:0000000004110682
When TCM is replaced, learning must be performed.

CAUTION:
• Before TCM is replaced, it is necessary to acquire the IP characteristic data based on the information
read out from the malfunctioning TCM. For acquiring the IP characteristic data, refer to “CONSULT-III
GT-R TCM CONFIGURATION MANUAL”.
• If no IP characteristic data can be acquired, it is necessary to replace TCM and the transmission
assembly as a set.
TCM REPLACEMENT : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004110683
CAUTION:
• Before TCM is replaced, it is necessary to acquire the IP characteristic data based on the information
read out from the malfunctioning TCM. For acquiring the IP characteristic data, refer to “CONSULT-III
GT-R TCM CONFIGURATION MANUAL”.
• If no IP characteristic data can be acquired, it is necessary to replace TCM and the transmission
assembly as a set.
1.ACQUIRE “IP CHARACTERISTICS DATA”
eu
Acquire the IP characteristics data. Refer to “CONSULT-III GT-R TCM CONFIGURATION MANUAL”.
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM “WRITE IP CHARACTERISTICS”
r e.
to
Perform “Write IP Chara - Replace TCM” in “Configuration”. Refer to TM-41, "CONSULT-III Function (GT-R
r-s
certified NISSAN dealer)".
>> GO TO 3.
t
3.SET LEARNING CONDITION

.g
With CONSULT-III
w
1. Start the engine.

w
2. Select “RANGE”, “ACCEL POSI SEN 1”, and “FLUID TEMP” in “Data Monitor”.
3. Set the condition as per the following.
w
RANGE :P
ACCEL POSI SEN 1 : 0.0/8
FLUID TEMP : 50 – 85 °C (122 – 185°F)
Is the learning condition fulfilled?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Go to 4 after the learning condition is fulfilled.
4.PERFORM “CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING”
With CONSULT-III
1. Perform “CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING” in “Work support”.
2. Select “Start”.
CAUTION:
The "CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING" must be completed at temperature within 50 – 90°C (122 – 194°F).
The learning is not yet completed if the temperature condition is outside the specified value during
learning.
Is "completed" displayed?
YES >> End of learning
NO >> GO TO 5.
TM-8
5.CHECK THE LEARNING CONDITION A

With CONSULT-III
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait for 15 seconds or more.
2. Start the engine. B
3. Select “RANGE”, “ACCEL POSI SEN 1”, “FLUID TEMP”, “BATTERY VOLTAGE”, “ENGINE SPEED”,
“VEHICLE SPEED”, and “LINE PRESSURE” in “Data Monitor”.
4. Check that the following learning condition is fulfilled.
C
RANGE :P
FLUID TEMP : 50 – 85 °C (122 – 185°F) TM
BATTERY VOLTAGE : 11 V or more
ENGINE SPEED : 650 – 2,000 rpm
VEHICLE SPEED : 3.5 km/h (2 MPH) or less E
LINE PRESSURE : 0.35 MPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 50.75 psi) or more
F
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM “ACTIVE TEST” (CLUTCH A SOLENOID)
eu
G
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “C/L A PRESS S/V” in “Active Test”.
2.
3.
Select “CLUTCH A PRESS”, and “TGT CLUTCH A PRS”.
e.
Raise “CLUTCH A PRESS” to 1.0 MPa (10.2 kg/cm2, 145 psi), and then lower it to 0 MPa (0 kg/cm2, 0
psi).
r H
to
4. Check that “CLUTCH A PRESS” and “TGT CLUTCH A PRS” follow with an equal value. I
r-s
Do “CLUTCH A PRESS” and “TGT CLUTCH A PRS” follow with an equal value?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”. J
t
7.PERFORM “ACTIVE TEST” (CLUTCH B SOLENOID)

.g
With CONSULT-III
w
K
1. Select “C/L B PRESS S/V” in “Active Test”.
2. Select “CLUTCH B PRESS”, and “TGT CLUTCH B PRS”.
w
3. Raise “CLUTCH B PRESS” to 1.0 MPa (10.2 kg/cm2, 145 psi), and then lower it to 0 MPa (0 kg/cm2, 0
L
w
psi).
4. Check that “CLUTCH B PRESS” and “TGT CLUTCH B PRS” follow with an equal value.
Do “CLUTCH B PRESS” and “TGT CLUTCH B PRS” follow with an equal value?
YES >> GO TO 4. M
NO >> Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”.
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
N
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT : Description INFOID:0000000004110684
When the transmission assembly is replaced, the learning must be performed. O

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000004110685
P
1.ACQUIRE “IP CHARACTERISTICS DATA”
Acquire the IP characteristics data. Refer to “CONSULT-III GT-R TCM CONFIGURATION MANUAL”.
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM “WRITE IP CHARACTERISTICS”
TM-9
Perform “Write IP Chara - Replace TM” in “Configuration”. Refer to TM-41, "CONSULT-III Function (GT-R cer-
tified NISSAN dealer)".
>> GO TO 3.
3.PREPARE BEFORE LEARNING
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Check the set values of “ADJUST CLUTCH A CAPACITY”, “ADJUST CLUTCH B CAPACITY”, “CLUTCH
A TOUCH POINT”, and “CLUTCH B TOUCH POINT” in "Work support".
Are the set values of all items 0?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 4 after the set values become 0.
4.PERFORM “DELETE GEAR POSITION LEARNING VALUE”
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “DELETE GEAR POSITION LEARNING VALUE” in “Work support”.
Can the gear position learning value be erased?
YES >> GO TO 5.
eu
NO >> Perform again, and if it cannot be erased, check the harnesses and connectors.
5.PERFORM “DELETE CLUTCH A LEARNING VALUE”
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “DELETE CLUTCH A LEARNING VALUE” in “Work support”.
r e.
to
Can the clutch A learning value be erased?
YES >> GO TO 6.
r-s
6.PERFORM “DELETE CLUTCH B LEARNING VALUE”
t
.g
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “DELETE CLUTCH B LEARNING VALUE” in “Work support”.
w
Can the clutch B learning value be erased?
w
YES >> GO TO 7.
w
7.PERFORM “ERASE CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT PRESSURE CORRECTION VALUE”

With CONSULT-III
1. Select “ERASE CLTCH ENGGMNT PRSSR CRRCTN” in “Work support”.
Can the clutch engagement pressure correction value be erased?
YES >> GO TO 8.
With CONSULT-III
RANGE :P
FLUID TEMP : 50 – 85 °C (122 – 185°F)
TM-10
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 9 after the learning condition is fulfilled. A
With CONSULT-III B
CAUTION:
The "CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING" must be completed at temperature within 50 – 90°C (122 – 194°F). C
learning.
Is "completed" displayed? TM
NO >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK THE LEARNING CONDITION E
With CONSULT-III
2. Start the engine. F
eu
4. Check that the following learning condition is fulfilled. G
RANGE :P
ACCEL POSI SEN 1
FLUID TEMP
BATTERY VOLTAGE
: 0.0/8
: 50 – 85 °C (122 – 185°F)
: 11 V or more
r e. H
to
ENGINE SPEED : 650 – 2,000 rpm I
r-s
VEHICLE SPEED : 3.5 km/h (2 MPH) or less

Is the learning condition fulfilled? J
t
.g
YES >> GO TO 11.

NO >> GO TO 9 after the learning condition is fulfilled.
w
K
w
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “C/L A PRESS S/V” in the “Active Test”. L
w
2. Select “CLUTCH A PRESS”, and “TGT CLUTCH A PRS”.

3. Raise “CLUTCH A PRESS” to 1.0 MPa (10.2 kg/cm2, 145 psi), and then lower it to 0 MPa (0 kg/cm2, 0
psi). M
4. Check that “CLUTCH A PRESS” and “TGT CLUTCH A PRS” follow with an equal value.
Do “CLUTCH A PRESS” and “TGT CLUTCH A PRS” follow with an equal value?
YES >> GO TO 12. N
12.PERFORM “ACTIVE TEST” (CLUTCH B SOLENOID)
With CONSULT-III O
1. Select “C/L B PRESS S/V” in “Active Test”.
2. Select “CLUTCH B PRESS”, and “TGT CLUTCH B PRS”.
3. Raise “CLUTCH B PRESS” to 1.0 MPa (10.2 kg/cm2, 145 psi), and then lower it to 0 MPa (0 kg/cm2, 0 P
psi).
4. Check that “CLUTCH B PRESS” and “TGT CLUTCH B PRS” follow with an equal value.
YES >> GO TO 9.
MAINTENANCE
TM-11
MAINTENANCE : Description INFOID:0000000004110686
Maintenance that is performed for the periodical maintenance and shock occurrence (transmission malfunc-
tion).
MAINTENANCE : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004110687
1.PREPARE BEFORE LEARNING

With CONSULT-III
2. Check the set values of “ADJUST CLUTCH A CAPACITY”, “ADJUST CLUTCH B CAPACITY”, “CLUTCH
A TOUCH POINT”, and “CLUTCH B TOUCH POINT” in "Work support".
CAUTION:
Never erase each learning value and the clutch engagement pressure correction value.
Are the set values of all items 0?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to 2 after the set values become 0.
With CONSULT-III
eu
RANGE
ACCEL POSI SEN 1
:P
: 0.0/8
r e.
to
FLUID TEMP : 50 – 85 °C (122 – 185°F)
r-s
YES >> GO TO 3.
t
.g
With CONSULT-III
w

w
CAUTION:
The "CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING" must be completed at temperature within 50 – 90°C (122 – 194°F).
w
learning.
Is "completed" displayed?
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THE LEARNING CONDITION
With CONSULT-III
4. Check that the following learning condition is fulfilled.
RANGE :P
FLUID TEMP : 50 – 85 °C (122 – 185°F)
BATTERY VOLTAGE : 11 V or more
ENGINE SPEED : 650 – 2,000 rpm
TM-12
VEHICLE SPEED : 3.5 km/h (2 MPH) or less
A

YES >> GO TO 5. B
With CONSULT-III C
1. Select “C/L A PRESS S/V” in “Active Test”.
2. Select “CLUTCH A PRESS”, and “TGT CLUTCH A PRS”.
3. Raise “CLUTCH A PRESS” to 1.0 MPa (10.2 kg/cm2, 145 psi), and then lower it to 0 MPa (0 kg/cm2, 0 TM
psi).
4. Check that “CLUTCH A PRESS” and “TGT CLUTCH A PRS” follow with an equal value.
Do “CLUTCH A PRESS” and “TGT CLUTCH A PRS” follow with an equal value? E
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM “ACTIVE TEST” (CLUTCH B SOLENOID) F
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “C/L B PRESS S/V” in the “Active Test”.
eu
2. Select “CLUTCH B PRESS”, and “TGT CLUTCH B PRS”. G
3. Raise “CLUTCH B PRESS” to 1.0 MPa (10.2 kg/cm2, 145 psi), and then lower it to 0 MPa (0 kg/cm2, 0
e.
psi).
4. Check that “CLUTCH B PRESS” and “TGT CLUTCH B PRS” follow with an equal value. H
r
to
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”. I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-13
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Structure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019824
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
eu
r e. NNDIA0081ZZ
to
1. Clutch A (even gear) 2. Clutch B (odd gear) 3. Transfer (E-TS)
4. Front reduction gear 5. Sleeve A1 (6th-Neutral synchroniz- 6. Sleeve A2 (2nd-4th synchronizer)
r-s
er)
7. Sleeve B1 (1st-Reverse synchroniz- 8. Parking gear 9. Rear reduction gear
er)
t
10. Rear final drive 11. 3rd gear 12. Sleeve B2 (3rd-5th synchronizer)
.g
13. 5th gear 14. Reverse gear 15. 1st gear

w
16. 4th gear 17. 2nd gear 18. 6th gear

19. Actuator control module (Oil pres- 20. Front control module (Oil pressure
w
sure control valve + Shift actuator) control valve + Oil pressure pump)
A. From main propeller shaft B. To front propeller shaft
w
CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
TM-14
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
TM
eu
G
r e. NNDIA0082ZZ
H
to
4. Front reduction gear 5. Sleeve A1 (6th-Neutral synchroniz- 6. Sleeve A2 (2nd-4th synchronizer) I
r-s
er)
er) J
t
.g

w
16. 4th gear 17. 2nd gear 18. 6th gear K

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
w
L
w
TM-15
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
eu
r e. NNDIA0083ZZ
to
4. Front reduction gear 5. Sleeve A1 (6th-Neutral synchroniz- 6. Sleeve A2 (2nd-4th synchronizer)
r-s
er)
er)
t
.g

w
16. 4th gear 17. 2nd gear 18. 6th gear
Shift Mechanism (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)

w
INFOID:0000000004019825
w
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JPDIA0906GB
OPERATION
The gear shift is mainly performed by the pre-shift and clutch release/engagement.
TM-16
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
NOTE:
• The pre-shift means that the gear on the clutch release side shifts to the next shift speed before a gear shift A
occurs.
• The clutch release/engagement means that while releasing the clutch on the gear position before gear shift,
the clutch on the gear position after gear shift is engaged during the gear shift.
B
Example: Shifting from 2nd gear to 3rd gear
1. Running with 2nd gear
- Shifting to the 2nd gear, clutch A is engaged and the 2nd gear is used to drive. C
TM
eu
G
2. Pre-shift (3rd gear)

r e. JPDIA0907GB
H
to
- For preparation for shifting from 2nd to 3rd, shift to the 3rd gear.
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
JPDIA0908GB N
3. Clutch release/engagement (gear shift from 2nd to 3rd)
TM-17
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
- While releasing clutch A, engage clutch B.
JPDIA0909GB
4. Running with 3rd gear

- Clutch B is engaged and the 3rd gear is used to drive.
- If the next gear shift is a downshift, the 2nd gear remains engaged, if an upshift, the 2nd gear is released
eu
and the 4th gear is engaged. (The figure shows the up side. Normal pre-shift is upshift.)
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
JPDIA0910GB
TM-18
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Operation Status and Control (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019826
TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
JPDIA0911GB
*: Pre-shift (pre-shift means that the gear on the clutch release side shifts to the next speed before a gear shift
occurs) J
t
Main Device (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)

.g
INFOID:0000000004019827
w
DUAL CLUTCH K
• It is equipped with 2 wet clutches, clutch A and clutch B, and each clutch is engaged or released by the
w
hydraulic piston.
• If there is no oil pressure, the return spring forces the piston to return, releasing the clutch. L
w
SHIFT DEVICE
• Each synchronizer is activated by its own shift actuator (hydraulic cylinder).
• Borg Warner type triple cone synchronizer is used for all the gear speeds. M
• A friction material is affixed to the cone surface of the synchronizer to allow higher capacity than a normal
cone made of copper alloy.
• The actuator control module is a unit integrated with the shift actuator and hydraulic control valve. N
Structure
• Component parts location
O
TM-19
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Synchronizer, shift fork
eu
r e. NNDIA0088ZZ
to
1. Sleeve A1 2. 6th gear 3. Actuator control module
4. 6th shift fork 5. 2nd-4th shift fork 6. 1st-Reverse shift fork
r-s
7. 3rd-5th shift fork 8. 3rd gear 9. Sleeve B2

10. 5th gear 11. Reverse gear 12. Sleeve B1
13. 1st gear 14. 4th gear 15. Sleeve A2
t
.g
16. 2nd gear

w
w
w
TM-20
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Actuator control module
A
TM
eu
G
r e. NNDIA0089ZZ
H
to
1. 6th-Neutral shift actuator 2. 2nd-4th shift actuator 3. 3rd-5th shift actuator
4. 1st-Reverse shift actuator I
r-s
A. 6th gear B. 2nd gear C. 4th gear

D. 1st gear E. Reverse F. 5th gear
G. 3rd gear J
t
.g
PARKING DEVICE
The parking lever is connected to the shift lever with the control cable and moves according to shift lever
w
K
switching.
w
Structure
• Component Parts Location L
w
NNDIA0090ZZ
TM-21
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
1. Parking gear 2. Parking pawl 3. Parking rod

4. Park position switch 5. Parking lever
Operation
• Operation diagram
Lock
eu
e.
NNDIA0091ZZ

r
to
Unlock
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
NNDIA0092ZZ

SHIFT LOCK DEVICE

• In the shift lock status, pressing the knob button lowers the plate with the detent pin, then moves slider B, but
when the plate contacts slider A, it can no longer be lowered.
• In the shift unlock status, sliders A and B are unified and the detent pin is moved out of P by lowered plate.
Structure
• Component parts location
TM-22
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
TM
NNDIA0123ZZ F
1. Plate 2. Detent pin 3. Slider A

4. Slider B
eu
G
A. Detent gate
e.
Operation
• Operation diagram H
r
Shift lock status
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
NNDIA0124ZZ
N
4. Slider B
A. Detent gate O
TM-23
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Shift unlock status
NNDIA0125ZZ

4. Slider B
eu
A. Detent gate
SHIFT LEVER
change switch signal to the TCM.

r e.
• It inputs the range position (P, R, N, A⇔M) and Auto/Manual range
to
• It is connected to the parking device of the transmission with the
control cable, and it locks the parking device only when the shift
lever is shifted into the P position.
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
NNDIA0114ZZ
PADDLE SHIFTER
TM-24
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
It inputs the switch signal of upshift or downshift to TCM.
A
1 : Paddle shifter (shift-down switch)
2 : Paddle shifter (shift-up switch)
B
JPDIA0925ZZ
TM
Set-up switch (transmission)
It inputs the switch signal of R mode or SNOW mode to TCM.
E
eu
G
NNDIA0116ZZ
LUBRICATION DEVICE
Clutch lubrication
r e. H
to
It lubricates clutches A and B with the hydraulic system.
I
Gear lubrication
r-s
It lubricates the gears, synchronizers, bearings and other sliding parts with the hydraulic system.
DISPLAY DEVICE J
t
.g
Information display
w
Message content Display timing Erasure procedure Remarks K

• Turn the ignition switch ON
w
Always blink the transmission

T/M SYSTEM MALFUNCTION again after turning OFF
When the check is necessary warning light when this mes-
VISIT DEALER • Erase the DTC using CON- L
w
sage is displayed
SULT-III
• When the engine start opera-
tion is performed in any range M
other than P or N Shift the shift lever to the P
SHIFT TO THE P RANGE —
• When the engine starts while range
the shift lever is in N range
and the gear is engaged N
CHECK POSITION OF SHIFT When the shift lever position Shift the shift lever into either
—
LEVER cannot be detected range of P, R, N, A ⇔ M
When the diagnosis is per- While this message is dis- O
T/M SYSTEM CHECK IN PRO- formed just after the engine Wait for a short period of time played, the shift lock solenoid
CESS starts while the shift lever is in until the diagnosis is completed prevents the shift lever from
the P range moving out of the P range
P
When the high oil temperature Always illuminate the transmis-
T/M OIL TEMP HIGH DE- When the high oil temperature
control is active because of high sion warning light when this
CREASE SPEED control is deactivated
transmission fluid temperature message is displayed
When the clutch protection con-
T/M CLUTCH TEMP HIGH Always illuminate the transmis-
trol is active because of high When the clutch protection con-
STOP VEHICLE UNTIL WARN- sion warning light when this
clutch temperature or stall driv- trol is deactivated
ING TURNS OFF message is displayed
ing
TM-25
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Shift position indicator
Upon receiving the CAN output signal from TCM, the drive gear
position appears and blinks, and the range is displayed.
A : Range position and drive gear position (A/M range)

B : A range or M range
NNDIA0119ZZ
Transmission warning light

It illuminates and blinks with the CAN output signal from TCM.
ON : It shows an intermittent malfunction such as high

transmission fluid temperature.
Blinking : It shows that a malfunction requiring a check occurs.
eu
e.
NNDIA0120ZZ
Mode indicator r
R mode lamp and SNOW mode lamp illuminate by the analog output
to
signal from TCM.
r-s
A : R mode lamp
B : SNOW mode lamp
t
.g
w
w
NNDIA0121ZZ
w
Multi-function display
The drive gear position, range position, transmission oil pressure and transmission oil temperature are dis-
played by the CAN output signal from TCM.
JPDIA0897ZZ
TM-26
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
A. Transmission oil temperature B. Transmission oil pressure C. Range position and drive gear posi- A
tion (A/M range)
D. A range or M range
Oil Pressure System (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019828

B
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
C
Component Function
Suction filter Removes foreign matter contained in fluid and prevents them from
entering the hydraulic circuit
TM
Inline filter
• Cools down fluid with the water-cooled cooler
Heat exchanger • When the engine starts at low temperature, warms fluid quickly
with heated coolant E
Sucks fluid accumulated in the oil pan to build up oil pressure in
Oil pump
the circuit
F
• Controls the line pressure
Line pressure valve
• The line pressure is adjusted by the line pressure solenoid
Clutch A solenoid valve
eu
Controls the clutch pressure of clutch A/B G
Clutch B solenoid valve
Front control module Valve
• Controls the lubricating flow
Lubricating flow valve
e.
• The lubricating flow is adjusted by the lubricating flow solenoid
H
Clutch lubricating switching r
Switches the lubricating distribution of the clutch.
valve
to
Pressure Clutch A pressure sensor
Detects the clutch pressure of clutch A/B I
sensor
r-s
Clutch B pressure sensor

Axis A feed pressure valve • Controls the feed pressure of axis A/B
• Each feed pressure is adjusted by the axis A/B feed pressure J
t
Axis B feed pressure valve solenoid

.g
Shift solenoid valve 1

Valve
w
Shift solenoid valve 2 K

Actuator control module Controls 4 shift actuator pistons by combining ON and OFF of
w
each shift solenoid valve and switching the sequence valve circuit
L
w
Sequence valve
Pressure
Line pressure sensor Detects the line pressure
sensor
M
TCM System (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019829
WIRING DIAGRAM N
TM-27
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
eu
r e.
to
tr-s
.g
w
w
w
JCDWA0235GB
TM-28
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
JCDWA0236GB
TM-29
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
eu
r e.
to
tr-s
.g
w
w
w
JCDWA0237GB
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
TM-30
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Component Function A
Controls the line pressure by B

Line pressure solenoid
the line pressure solenoid
valve
current
C
JPDIA0915GB
Clutch A solenoid valve

TM
Controls the clutch pressure
Valve of clutches A/B by the clutch
Clutch B solenoid valve A/B solenoid current E
JPDIA0916GB
Front control module F
Controls the lubricating flow
eu
Lubricating flow solenoid
by the lubricating flow sole-
G
valve
noid current
Clutch A pressure sensor

r e. JPDIA0917GB
H
to
I
r-s
Pressure Converts the clutch pressure

sensor Clutch B pressure sensor of clutches A/B into voltage
J
t
.g
JPDIA0918GB
w
K
w
L
w
TM-31
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Component Function
Axis A feed pressure sole-
noid valve
Controls the feed pressure of

axes A/B by the axes A/B
Axis B feed pressure sole- feed pressure solenoid
noid valve
Valve JPDIA0919GB

Controls 4 shift actuator pistons by combining ON and OFF of
each shift solenoid valve*1
Sequence solenoid valve
Actuator control module
Pressure Converts the line pressure

Line pressure sensor
sensor into voltage
eu
JPDIA0920GB
e.
1st-Reverse position sen-
sor 1 • Converts each shift actua-
r
tor position into voltage
1st-Reverse position sen-
to
• Two 1st-reverse position
Position sor 1
sensors with the same out-
sensor
2nd-4th position sensor put (but the output charac-
r-s
teristics are inverse) are

6th-Neutral position sensor
installed for fail-safe
3rd-5th position sensor JPDIA0921GB
t
.g
Clutch A speed sensor

Converts the clutches A/B speed into pulse
Wheel sensor Clutch B speed sensor
w
Output shaft speed sensor Converts the output shaft speed into pulse
w
When the parking position is locked, it is energized, and when un-

Park position switch
locked, it is not energized
w
Converts the oil pan oil tem-

Fluid temperature sensor perature into electrical resis-
tance
JPDIA0922GB
TCM Controls the transmission system

Range sensor No. 0
Range sensor No. 1
Range Range sensor No. 2

sensor With 6 range sensors, the shift lever position is recognized*2
Range sensor No. 3
Shift device Range sensor No. 4
Range sensor No. 5
Auto/Manual range change switch Inputs the Auto/Manual range change switch signal to TCM
Lock or unlock is attained with 3 systems, the ignition switch sig-
Shift lock solenoid
nal, stop lamp switch signal and lock or unlock signal (TCM)
TM-32
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Component Function
A
Normally not energized, and energized by turning the set-up
R mode switch
switch to R
Set-up switch
Normally not energized, and energized by turning the set-up
SNOW mode switch B
switch to SNOW
TCM relay Perform the power supply to TCM
*1: For the combination of the solenoids, refer to the “Shift actuator operation list”.
C
*2: For the combination of the range sensors, refer to the “Shift lever position and range sensor output”.
Shift actuator operation list
–: No effect on operation
TM
Solenoid valve
Shift actuator Operation
Sequence Shift 1 Shift 2 Shift 3 Shift 4
6th gear → N ON OFF – – E
6th-Neutral shift actuator ON
6th gear ← N OFF ON – –
2nd gear → N → 4th gear ON OFF – –

2nd-4th shift actuator OFF F
2nd gear ← N ← 4th gear OFF ON – –
5th gear → N → 3rd gear – – OFF ON

3rd-5th shift actuator ON
eu
5th gear ← N ← 3rd gear – – ON OFF G
1st gear → N → Reverse – – ON OFF
1st-Reverse shift actuator OFF
1st gear ← N ← Reverse
Shift lever position and range sensor output

r e. – – OFF ON H
to
Range sensor
Shift lever position
No. 0 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5 I
r-s
P ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

R OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
J
t
N OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

.g
A⇔M OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

w
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL LIST K

w
L
w
TM-33
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
: Directly related : Indirectly related
Control
Hydraulic solenoid valve control Gear shift control
Adaptive shift
Clutch Shift
control
Gear position sensor learning

Clutch touch point learning
Auto upshift and downshift

Predictive pre-shift control
Items
Shift pattern switching

Clutch lubrication
Blipping control
Auto downshift
Feed pressure
Line pressure
Gear fixed
Gear shift
Standby
Start-up
Lockup
Shift
Clutch A pressure solenoid
valve
Clutch B pressure solenoid
valve
eu
Line pressure solenoid valve
Lubricating flow solenoid

valve

e.
Output signal

r
to
r-s
Sequence solenoid valve

t
.g
Axis A feed pressure solenoid

valve
w
Axis B feed pressure solenoid

valve
w
Engine torque down request*1

w
TM-34
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Control
A
Hydraulic solenoid valve control Gear shift control
Adaptive shift
Clutch Shift
control
B
Gear position sensor learning

Clutch touch point learning
Auto upshift and downshift

Predictive pre-shift control
Items
Shift pattern switching

C
Clutch lubrication
Blipping control
Auto downshift
Feed pressure
Line pressure
TM
Gear fixed
Gear shift
Standby
Start-up
Lockup
Shift
E
Range signal
Stop lamp switch

F
Clutch A pressure
Clutch B pressure
eu
1st-Reverse position 1 G
1st-Reverse position 1
2nd-4th position
3rd-5th position
r e. H
to
Input signal
6th-Neutral position I
r-s
Clutch A speed
Clutch B speed
J
t
.g
Output shaft speed

w
K
Oil temperature
w
Engine speed
L
w
Engine speed*1
Engine torque*1
Throttle position*1
M
Side G sensor signal*2

*1: CAN signal (ECM) N
*2: CAN signal [ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)]
CONTROL
O
Clutch control
• With no gear shift
- The inactive-side (the side with no power transmission) clutch is fully released (zero pressure).
P
- The active side (the side with power transmission) is controlled as per the following depending on the situa-
tion.
• Standby: In A/M range or R range, with the accelerator pedal OFF, the pressure is built up until just before
the clutch is engaged (at brake ON), or partial clutch engagement status is reached (at brake OFF) to
increase the start-up response.
• Start-up: Pressure is controlled depending on the engine speed for smooth start-up and stop.
• Lockup (with low output shaft speed): Slip lockup (the pressure is controlled so that the clutches have a
small speed difference to increase the noise and vibration performance).
TM-35
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
• Lockup (with high output shaft speed): Full lockup (the pressure is controlled depending on the engine
torque so that the engagement torque necessary for clutch full engagement is acquired).
NOTE:
For example, when the gear is in the 1st position, the active side is the axis B side and the inactive side is the
axis A side.
• When shifting gears
- When a gear shift from the axis A (axis B) gear to shift B (axis A) gear, both clutch pressures are controlled
so that while the clutch A (clutch B) is being released the clutch B (clutch A) is engaged to prevent a torque
interrupt or shift shock.
- Both clutch pressures are controlled depending on the clutch speed difference and engine torque.
- TCM commands the engine torque down to ECM to lower the engine torque.
Shift control
• The shift actuator is controlled by combining ON and OFF of the 4 shift solenoids and sequence solenoids.
• The shift solenoid and sequence solenoid are ON only during a shift, and OFF when the shift is completed.
(The engaged gear and neutral status of the shift lever are maintained with the shift check as MT vehicles)
Line pressure control
• The pressure required to control both axes A and B clutches and shifts is set.
• Normally, the pressure is changed depending on the engine torque so that the pressure necessary for the
clutch engagement is reached.
• If, during a shift, the pressure necessary for the shift is not reached, the pressure is increased.
eu
Feed pressure control
• The pressure required to control clutch A and shift is set for the axis A feed pressure, and the pressure to
e.
control clutch B and shift is set for the axis B feed pressure.
• For the inactive side, a constant low pressure is set, and the pressure is increased up to the pressure neces-
r
sary for a shift according to the shift request command. When the shift is completed, the initial pressure is
to
resumed.
• For the active side, the pressure is changed depending on the engine torque so that the pressure necessary
r-s
for the clutch engagement is reached.

Clutch lubrication control
• The lubricant level necessary for cooling the clutch is controlled depending on the clutch speed for clutches
t
A and B, engine speed, engine torque, and oil temperature.

.g
Learning control
w
• Clutch learning
- By detecting the clutch pressure variations with the clutch A/B pressure sensors, the pressure just before the
w
clutch engagement is memorized.

• Gear position learning
w
- By moving the shift lever into any gear, the engaged gear position and neutral position from the position sen-
sor are memorized.
Adaptive shift control (ASC)
Depending on the road situation (uphill, downhill, or cornering) or driving style, the auto downshift, fixing of
gear, or shift map change is performed.
Operation
• Auto downshift
- The downhill conditions are judged by the engine torque and vehicle speed, and a downshift to the optimum
gear is made depending on the inclination.
• Gear fixing
- The uphill and downhill conditions are judged by the engine torque and vehicle speed, and the gear is fixed
to the selected position.
- The cornering conditions are judged by the signals from the side G sensor, and the gear is fixed to the
selected position.
• Shift map switching
TM-36
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
- If the driving becomes harder, the shift map for higher engine speed is selected according to the longitudinal
G, side G, throttle opening and engine torque. In addition, in R mode, a change to an appropriate shift map A
is easier than that in Normal or SNOW mode.
TM
JPDIA0912GB
F
• Operation comparison of adaptive shift control at cornering
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
JPDIA0913GB
Blipping control L
w
To reduce the shift time and shift shock during a downshift, the engine speed after the downshift is calculated
and controlled to engage the clutch.
Predictive pre-shift control M
In the R mode of M range, driving with frequent acceleration and deceleration is assumed, and in order to
reduce both the upshift and downshift time, the pre-shift is switched to the upshift or downshift in advance.
NOTE:
In any mode of the A range, and in Normal mode of the M range, the upshift time reduction has priority, thus N
the pre-shift is always switched to the upshift. (For example, when driving in the 2nd gear, a pre-shift to the 3rd
gear occurs)
O
Operation
TM-37
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
• Based on the map (pre-shift map) of the vehicle speed and accel-
erator pedal position, the pre-shift is switched either to the upshift
waiting or downshift waiting. Each drive gear has its own pre-shift
map and all settings have the broader upshift waiting range.
JPDIA0914GB
Component Parts Location (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019830
eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
JPDIA0896ZZ
1. A range indicator 2. Shift position indicator 3. M range indicator

4. Transmission warning light 5. Information display 6. Paddle shifter (shift-down switch)
7. Paddle shifter (shift-up switch) 8. Stop lamp switch 9. Accelerator pedal position sensor
10. Set-up switch 11. Range sensor 12. Auto/Manual range change switch
TM-38
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
13. TCM 14. TCM relay 15. Back-up lamp relay
16. Transmission connector 17. Output shaft speed sensor 18. Clutch A speed sensor A
19. Clutch B speed sensor 20. Heat exchanger 21. Actuator control module
22. Fluid temperature sensor 23. Front control module 24. Park position switch
A. Combination meter B. Steering assembly C. Rear of LH instrument lower panel B
D. Center console E. Control device assembly F. Trunk room
G. Left side of trunk room H. Transmission assembly
The following parts are integrated into the actuator control module (21). C
Axis A feed pressure solenoid valve Axis B feed pressure solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve 1
Shift solenoid valve 2 Shift solenoid valve 3 Shift solenoid valve 4
Sequence solenoid valve Line pressure sensor 1st-Reverse position sensor 1
TM
1st-Reverse position sensor 1 2nd-4th position sensor 6th-Neutral position sensor
3rd-5th position sensor
E
The following parts are integrated into the front control module (23).
Line pressure solenoid valve Clutch A solenoid valve Clutch B solenoid valve
Lubricating flow solenoid valve Clutch A pressure sensor Clutch B pressure sensor
F
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-39
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Diagnosis Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019831
Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
eu
r e.
to
tr-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-40
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
A
CONSULT-III Function (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019832
FUNCTION B
Items Function
Ecu Identification Displays control unit part number or identification number. C
Self Diagnostic Result Receives self-diagnosis results from control unit and displays DTCs.
Data Monitor Receives, displays and records the input/output signals from control unit.
TM
Active Test Transmits commands to control unit to change output signals and check operation of output system.
Work support Adjusts the components or systems quickly and exactly.
Configuration Writes the data such as vehicle specification information to control unit. E
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Displays the communication status of CAN.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

F
Refer to TM-233, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
eu
Display Item List G
X: Standard, –: Not applicable, : Option
e.
Monitor menu
H
rSELEC-
Item name (Unit) ECU Remarks
MAIN TION
to
INPUT
SIGNALS FROM
SIGNALS
ITEM I
r-s
Displays the sleeve B1 position calculated from the

SLEEVE B1 POSI 1 (mm or in.) – X
signal voltage of the 1st-Reverse position sensor 1.
Displays the sleeve B1 position calculated from the J
t
SLEEVE B1 POSI 2 (mm or in.) – X

.g
signal voltage of the 1st-Reverse position sensor 2.

Displays the signal voltage of the 1st-Reverse posi-
1-R POSITION SEN 1 (mV) X –
w
tion sensor 1. K
Displays the signal voltage of the 1st-Reverse posi-
w
1-R POSITION SEN 2 (mV) X –

tion sensor 2.
L
w
Displays the sleeve A2 position calculated from the

SLEEVE A2 POSI (mm or in.) – X
signal voltage of the 2nd-4th position sensor.
Displays the signal voltage of the 2nd-4th position
2-4 POSITION SEN (mV) X –
sensor. M
Displays the sleeve B2 position calculated from the
SLEEVE B2 POSI (mm or in.) – X
signal voltage of the 3rd-5th position sensor.
3-5 POSITION SEN (mV) X –

Displays the signal voltage of the 3rd-5th position N
sensor.
Displays the sleeve A1 position calculated from the
SLEEVE A1 POSI (mm or in.) – X
signal voltage of the 6th-Neutral position sensor. O
Displays the signal voltage of the 6th-Neutral posi-
6-N POSITION SEN (mV) X –
tion sensor.
Displays the ABS operation signal received from P
ABS OPERATION SIG (On/Off) X – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
Displays the accelerator pedal position signal re-
ACCEL POSI SEN 1 (0.0/8) X –
ceived from ECM via CAN communication.
Monitors the command value from TCM to the shift
MON SHIFT SOL 1 (On/Off) X –
solenoid valve 1, and displays the monitor value.
TM-41
Monitor menu
SELEC-
MAIN TION
INPUT
SIGNALS FROM
SIGNALS
ITEM
Displays the command value from TCM to the shift
COMM SHIFT S/V 1 (On/Off) – –
solenoid valve 1.
solenoid valve 2.
solenoid valve 3.
solenoid valve 4.
eu
Displays the transmission fluid temperature calculat-
FLUID TEMP (°C) – – ed from the signal voltage of the oil temperature sen-
sor.
e.
Displays the signal voltage of the oil temperature
FLUID TEMP SEN (mV) X –
r sensor.
Displays the axis A feed pressure target value of
to
TRGT AXIS A PRESS (MPa) – –
TCM.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the axis
r-s
A feed pressure solenoid valve, and displays the

MON AXIS A S/V (A) X –
monitor value. (It does not always correspond to the
axis A feed pressure solenoid valve value)
t
.g
Displays the command current from TCM to the axis

COMM AXIS A S/V (A) – –
A feed pressure solenoid valve.
w
Displays the axis B feed pressure target value of

TRGT AXIS B PRESS (MPa) – –
TCM.
w
Monitors the command current from TCM to the axis

B feed pressure solenoid valve, and displays the
w
MON AXIS B S/V (A) X –

monitor value. (It does not always correspond to the
axis B feed pressure solenoid valve value)
Displays the command current from TCM to the axis
COMM AXIS B S/V (A) – –
B feed pressure solenoid valve.
Displays the operation status of the stop lamp
STOP LAMP SW (On/Off) X –
switch.
Displays the clutch A pressure calculated from the
CLUTCH A PRESS (MPa) – –
signal voltage of the clutch A pressure sensor.
Displays the signal voltage of the clutch A pressure
CLUTCH A PRS SEN (mV) X –
sensor.
TGT CLUTCH A PRS (MPa) – – Displays the clutch A pressure target value of TCM.
Displays the clutch A speed calculated from the

CLUTCH A SPEED (rpm) – –
pulse signal of the clutch A speed sensor.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
clutch A solenoid valve, and displays the monitor val-
MON CLUTCH A S/V (A) X –
ue. (It does not always correspond to the clutch A so-
lenoid valve value)
Displays the command current from TCM to the
COM CLUTCH A S/V (A) – –
clutch A solenoid valve.
TM-42
Monitor menu
A
SELEC-
MAIN TION
INPUT
SIGNALS FROM
SIGNALS
ITEM B
Displays the estimated clutch A temperature calcu-
CLUTCH A TEMP (°C) – –
lated by TCM.
Displays the clutch B pressure calculated from the C
CLUTCH B PRESS (MPa) – –
signal voltage of the clutch B pressure sensor.
Displays the signal voltage of the clutch B pressure
CLUTCH B PRS SEN (mV) X –
sensor. TM
TGT CUTCH B PRES (MPa) – – Displays the clutch B pressure target value of TCM.
Displays the clutch B speed calculated from the
CLUTCH B SPEED (rpm) – –
pulse signal of the clutch B speed sensor. E
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
clutch B solenoid valve, and displays the monitor val-
MON CLUTCH B S/V (A) X –
ue. (It does not always correspond to the clutch B so- F
lenoid valve value)
Displays the command current from TCM to the
COM CLUTCH B S/V (A) – –
clutch B solenoid valve.
eu
G
Displays the estimated clutch B temperature calcu-
CLUTCH B TEMP (°C) – –
lated by TCM.
e.
Displays the transmission gear positions recognized H
GR POSITION – –
r by TCM.
Displays the engine speed signal received from ECM
to
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X
via CAN communication.
I
Displays the transmission gear positions recognized
r-s
GR POSI INDICATION – X
by TCM.
IGN SW (On/Off) X – Displays the operation status of the ignition switch. J

t
.g
Displays the line pressure value calculated from the

LINE PRESSURE (MPa) – –
signal voltage of the line pressure sensor.
w
Displays the signal voltage of the line pressure sen- K

LINE PRESS SENSOR (mV) X –
sor.
w
TRGT LINE PRESS (MPa) – – Displays the line pressure target value of TCM.
L
w
Monitors the command current from TCM to the line

pressure solenoid valve, and displays the monitor
MON LINE PRES S/V (A) X –
value. (It does not always correspond to the line
pressure solenoid valve value)
M
Displays the command current from TCM to the line
COM LINE PRES S/V (A) – –
pressure solenoid valve.
TRGT LUBE PRESS (MPa) – – Displays the lubricating flow target value of TCM. N
Monitors the command current from TCM to the lu-
bricating flow solenoid valve, and displays the moni-
MON LUBE S/V (A) X –
tor value. (It does not always correspond to the O
lubricating flow solenoid valve value)
Displays the command current from TCM to the lubri-
COMM LUBE S/V (A) – –
cating flow solenoid valve.
P
Displays the operation status of the Auto/Manual
AM RANGE CHG SW 1 (On/Off) X –
range change switch 1.
Displays the operation status of the Auto/Manual
AM RANGE CHG SW 2 (On/Off) X –
range change switch 2.
Displays the set-up switch (transmission) and driving
MODE – X
range statuses.
TM-43
Monitor menu
SELEC-
MAIN TION
INPUT
SIGNALS FROM
SIGNALS
ITEM
Displays the operation status of the R mode lamp on
COM R MODE LAMP (On/Off) – –
the set-up switch (transmission).
Displays the operation status of the SNOW mode
COM S MODE LMP (On/Off) – –
lamp on the set-up switch (transmission).
Displays the neutral status judged by TCM from the
COM NEUTRAL SIG (On/Off) – – range sensor and park position switch in the control
device.
Displays the output shaft speed calculated from the
OUTPUT SHAFT SPD (rpm) – –
pulse signal of the output shaft speed sensor.
Displays the operation status of the park position
PARK POSITION SW (On/Off) X –
switch.
RANGE – X Displays the shift lever positions recognized by TCM.
Displays the command value from TCM to the back-
COM BACK LMP RLY (On/Off) – –
up lamp relay.
eu
Monitors the command value from TCM to the back-
MON BACK LMP RLY (On/Off) X –
up lamp relay, and displays the monitor value.
Monitors the command value from TCM to the se-
e.
MON SEQ S/V (On/Off) X – quence solenoid valve, and displays the monitor val-
r ue.
Displays the command value from TCM to the se-
to
COMM SEQ S/V (On/Off) – –
quence solenoid valve.
Displays the operation status of the R mode switch
r-s
R MODE SW (On/Off) X –
on the set-up switch (transmission).
Displays the operation status of the SNOW mode
SNOW MODE SW (On/Off) X –
t
switch on the set-up switch (transmission).

.g
Displays the operation status of the range sensor

TR SENSOR No.0 (On/Off) X –
No.0 in the control device.
w

w

w

(km/h or Displays the vehicle speed signal (meter) received
VEHICLE SPEED X X
mph) via CAN communication from the combination meter.
Displays the command value from TCM to the starter
COM STARTER RLY (On/Off) – –
relay.
Monitors the command value from TCM to the starter
MON STARTER RLY (On/Off) X –
relay, and displays the monitor value.
Displays the operation status of the paddle shifter
PADDLE SFT (DOWN) (On/Off) X –
(shift-down switch).
Displays the operation status of the paddle shifter
PADDLE SFT (UP) (On/Off) X –
(shift-up switch).
Displays the accelerator pedal position signal re-
ACCEL POSI SEN 2 (0.0/8) X –
ceived from ECM via CAN communication.
TM-44
Monitor menu
A
SELEC-
MAIN TION
INPUT
SIGNALS FROM
SIGNALS
ITEM B
BATTERY VOLTAGE (V) X X Displays the power supply voltage of TCM.
Displays the VDC operation signal received from
VDC OPERATION SIG (On/Off) X – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN C
communication.
TCM RELAY (On/Off) – – Displays the operation status of the TCM relay.
TM
Displays the operation status of the shift lock sole-
SHIFT LOCK SOL (On/Off) – –
noid.
ACTIVE TEST E
Procedure
1. Apply parking brake.
F
2. Shift the shift lever to the P position.
CAUTION:
Check that the park lock operates.
eu
3. Start the engine. G
4. Select the operation item.
e.
NOTE:
• Operable only in the P position, and inoperable in other positions. H
• Only one item is operable, and multiple items cannot be operated at the same time.
r
to
Test item list
I
r-s
Items Function check

SHIFT S/V 1
In response to the ON/OFF command from CONSULT-III, TCM supplies the current to the sole- J
t
SHIFT S/V 2
.g
noid valve to enable an operation check of the solenoid valve.

SHIFT S/V 3 CAUTION:
If the solenoid valve has a malfunction such as sticking, it does not operate. Check for
w
SHIFT S/V 4
operation noise or vibrations.
K
SEQUENCE S/V
w
LINE PRESS S/V

In response to the pressure indication value from CONSULT-III, TCM supplies the current to the L
w
C/L B PRESS S/V solenoid valve to enable an operation check of the solenoid valve.
C/L A PRESS S/V CAUTION:
If the solenoid valve has a malfunction such as sticking, it does not operate. Check using
LUBRICATION FLOW-RATE S/V Data Monitor. M
A-AXIS SUPPLY PRESSURE S/V NOTE:
Controls so that the oil pressure is built up in each solenoid valve.
B-AXIS SUPPLY PRESSURE S/V
STARTER RELAY In response to the ON/OFF command from CONSULT-III, TCM supplies the current to the relay N
to enable an operation check of the relay.
REVERSE LAMP RELAY
CAUTION:
If the relay has a malfunction such as sticking, it does not operate. Check for an operation
TCM RELAY O
noise or vibrations.
In response to the ON/OFF command from CONSULT-III, TCM supplies the current to the shift
lock solenoid to enable an operation check of the shift lock solenoid.
CAUTION: P
If the solenoid has a malfunction such as sticking, it does not operate. Check for an oper-
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
ation noise or vibrations.
NOTE:
With the engine running and the brake pedal depressed, check that the shift lever can be moved
from the P position in accordance with the ON/OFF operation.
WORK SUPPORT
TM-45
トランスミッション現象別作業フロー
Following the work order descrived below enables the adjustment of an appropriate transmission condition.
Work order depends on vehicle conditions.
Maintenance
Item Replacement of transmission
Periodic inspection
assembly
Check symptom 1
CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING 3 3
WRITE PREVIOUS CLUTCH LEARNING
VALUE
• DELETE GEAR POSITION LEARNING
VALUE
• DELETE CLUTCH A LEARNING VALUE
1
• ERASE CLUTCH ENGGMNTPRSSR
CRRCTN
Clutch capacity up.
ADJUST
CLUTCH A Clutch capacity down.
CAPACITY
Set clutch capacity to 0. 2 2
eu
CONSULT-III
function Clutch capacity up.
ADJUST
(TRANSMIS-
CLUTCH B Clutch capacity down.
e.
SION)
Work CAPACITY
item r
Move the clutch touch point
to
closer.
CLUTCH A
TOUCH Move the clutch touch point
r-s
POINT farther.
Set Clutch touch point to 0. 2 2
t

.g
closer.
CLUTCH B
w
POINT farther.
w
CONSULT-III
w
function IDLE AIR VOL LEARN

(ENGINE)
Traveling check 4 4
Traveling check by customer 5 5
Clutch clearance returns to an
optimum value because
“CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING”
is simultaneously performed
Remarks —
within “CLUTCH TOUCH
POINT LEARNING”. There-
fore, gear feeling and creep
strength may change.
TM-46
TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-47
Comments from customer
Item When shifting up or down, a When shifting up or down, a

large shock occurs at gear slipping feel increases.
shifting.
Check symptom 1 1
CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING 3, 11 3, 11
10 10
VALUE
VALUE
CRRCTN
6, 12
(When shifting gear from odd
Clutch capacity up.
number to even number, a slip-
ping feel increases)
ADJUST
CLUTCH A 6, 12
CAPACITY (When shifting gear from odd
Clutch capacity down.
eu
number to even number, a
large shock occurs)
Set clutch capacity to 0. 2, 9 2, 9
CONSULT-III
function
(TRANSMIS-
SION)
Clutch capacity up.
r e. 6, 12
(When shifting gear from even
number to odd number, a slip-
to
Work
ping feel increases)
item ADJUST
CLUTCH B 6, 12
r-s
CAPACITY (When shifting gear from even

number to odd number, a large
shock occurs)
t
.g

w
closer.
CLUTCH A
w
POINT farther.
w
Set Clutch touch point to 0. 2, 9 2, 9

closer.
CLUTCH B
POINT farther.
CONSULT-III
(ENGINE)
Traveling check 4, 7, 13 4, 7, 13
Traveling check by customer 5, 8, 14 5, 8, 14
TM-48
A
Item When shifting up or down, a When shifting up or down, a
large shock occurs at gear slipping feel increases.
shifting.
• Clutch clearance returns to • Clutch clearance returns to B
an optimum value because an optimum value because
“CLUTCH GEAR LEARN- “CLUTCH GEAR LEARN-
ING” is simultaneously per- ING” is simultaneously per-
formed within “CLUTCH formed within “CLUTCH
C
TOUCH POINT LEARN- TOUCH POINT LEARN-
Remarks ING”. Therefore, gear feeling ING”. Therefore, gear feel-
and creep strength may ing and creep strength may TM
change. change.
• When lowering the clutch ca- • When increasing the clutch
pacity too much, a slipping capacity too much, a shock
feel may occur when starting may increase by shifting E
the vehicle or shifting gears. gears.
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-49
Item When starting the vehicle, a When starting the vehicle, a

large shock occurs or the en- slipping feel increases.
gine revolutions blow up.
Check symptom 1 1
CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING 3, 11 3, 11
10 10
VALUE
VALUE
CRRCTN
6, 12
(When starting the vehicle
Clutch capacity up.
ADJUST with 2nd gear, a slipping feel
CLUTCH A increases)
CAPACITY
eu
CONSULT-III 6, 12
function (When starting the vehicle
e.
Clutch capacity up.
(TRANSMIS- ADJUST with 1st gear, a slipping feel
SION) CLUTCH B increases)
Work
item
CAPACITY
r
to
r-s
6, 12
(Occurrence of starting the vehi-
closer.
CLUTCH A cle with 2nd gear）
t
TOUCH
.g
POINT
farther.
w
6, 12
w
(Occurrence of starting the vehi-

closer.
CLUTCH B cle with 1st gear)
w
TOUCH
POINT
farther.
CONSULT-III
(ENGINE)
Traveling check 4, 7, 13 4, 7, 13
Traveling check by customer 5, 8, 14 5, 8, 14
• Clutch clearance returns to • Clutch clearance returns to
an optimum value because an optimum value because
“CLUTCH GEAR LEARN- “CLUTCH GEAR LEARN-
ING” is simultaneously per- ING” is simultaneously per-
formed within “CLUTCH formed within “CLUTCH
TOUCH POINT LEARNING”. TOUCH POINT LEARN-
Remarks Therefore, gear feeling and ING”. Therefore, gear feel-
creep strength may change. ing and creep strength may
• When narrowing clearance change.
too much, “Excessive creep” • When increasing the clutch
or “Low engine rev when op- capacity too much, a shock
erating select lever or paddle may increase by shifting
shifter” may occur. gears.
TM-50
Comments from customer A

Item
When starting the vehicle, creep strength increases.
Check symptom 1
B
CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING 3, 11
VALUE
C
VALUE
• DELETE CLUTCH A LEARNING VALUE TM
CRRCTN
ADJUST
Clutch capacity up. E
CAPACITY
Set clutch capacity to 0. 2
F
CONSULT-III Clutch capacity up.
ADJUST
function
(TRANSMIS-
CAPACITY
eu
SION) Set clutch capacity to 0. 2 G
Work
item Move the clutch touch point
closer.
e.
CLUTCH A
7 H
(When starting the vehicle with 2nd gear, creep strength increas-
r
POINT farther.
es)
to
Set Clutch touch point to 0. 2
I
r-s

closer.
CLUTCH B
7 J
t
(When starting the vehicle with 1st gear, creep strength increas-
.g
POINT farther.
es.)
w
K
CONSULT-III
w
function IDLE AIR VOL LEARN 4

(ENGINE)
L
w
Traveling check 5, 8
Traveling check by customer 6, 9
• Clutch clearance returns to an optimum value because M
“CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING” is simultaneously performed
within “CLUTCH TOUCH POINT LEARNING”. Therefore, gear
Remarks
feeling and creep strength may change.
• When widening the clutch clearance too much, “Engine rev N
blowup at startup” or “Large shock at startup” may occur.
TM-51

When shifting the selector lever • When shifting the selector
from P/N to A/R, a large shock lever from P/N to A/R, en-
Item occurs. gine revolutions decreases.
• When shifting from M1 to
M2 with the paddle shifter,
engine revolutions decreas-
es.
Check symptom 1 1
CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING 3 3
VALUE
VALUE
CRRCTN
Clutch capacity up.
ADJUST
eu
CAPACITY
CONSULT-III
e.
ADJUST
(TRANSMIS- CLUTCH B Clutch capacity down.
SION) CAPACITY
Work
item
Set clutch capacity to 0.
r 2 2
to
closer.
CLUTCH A
r-s
TOUCH Move the clutch touch point 7

POINT farther. （When shifting to M2)
t

.g

closer.
CLUTCH B
w
TOUCH Move the clutch touch point 7

POINT farther.
w
(When shifting to A, M1 or R）
w
CONSULT-III
(ENGINE)
Traveling check 4 5, 8
Traveling check by customer 5 6, 9
Clutch clearance returns to an • Clutch clearance returns to
optimum value because an optimum value because
“CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING” is “CLUTCH GEAR LEARN-
simultaneously performed within ING” is simultaneously per-
“CLUTCH TOUCH POINT formed within “CLUTCH
LEARNING”. Therefore, gear TOUCH POINT LEARN-
feeling and creep strength may ING”. Therefore, gear feel-
Remarks
change. ing and creep strength may
change.
• When widening the clutch
clearance to much, “Engine
rev blowup at startup” or
“Large shock at startup”
may occur.
TM-52
Comments from customer A

• While driving, an abnormal noise and a shock occur when de-
Item pressing the brake pedal to reduce speed and shifting down
from the 3rd to the 2nd. B
• While driving with the 2nd gear, the driving force at around
idle becomes large.
Check symptom 1
C
CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING 3
VALUE TM
VALUE
E
CRRCTN
Clutch capacity up. F
ADJUST
CAPACITY
Set clutch capacity to 0. 2
eu
CONSULT-III G
ADJUST
(TRANSMIS-
SION)
e.
Work CAPACITY
item
Set clutch capacity to 0. 2 H
r
to
closer.
CLUTCH A
TOUCH Move the clutch touch point I
7
r-s
POINT farther.
Move the clutch touch point J
t
.g
closer.
CLUTCH B
w
POINT farther. K
w
CONSULT-III
L
w

(ENGINE)
Traveling check 5, 8
Traveling check by customer 6, 9 M
• Clutch clearance returns to an optimum value because
“CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING” is simultaneously performed
within “CLUTCH TOUCH POINT LEARNING”. Therefore, N
Remarks gear feeling and creep strength may change.
• When widening the clutch clearance too much, “Engine rev
blowup at startup with 2nd gear” or “Large shock at startup
with 2nd gear” may occur. O
Procedure
1. Apply parking brake. P
CAUTION:
NOTE:
The operation is available only after the ignition switch is turned ON, except for the “CLUTCH GEAR
LEARNING”, “GEAR POSITION TEST”, and “DISENGAGING THE GEAR”.
TM-53
NOTE:
• Operable only in the P position, and inoperable in other positions.
• Only one item is operable, and multiple items cannot be operated at the same time.
Display Item List
Items Function or item Application

Perform the learning of the clutch touch point and the engaged
gear position and neutral position for each gear.
CAUTION:
Always perform this procedure
• Clutch gear learning can only be performed once in one
CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING during maintenance and when
driving cycle (the ignition switch OFF→ON→OFF).
TCM or transmission is replaced.
• If no clutch gear learning can be performed, it is neces-
sary to turn the ignition switch OFF→ON, and perform
the clutch gear learning again.
Check the clutch gear learning status.
After the clutch gear learning, a
CAUTION:
READ CLUTCH GEAR LEARN- check that the learning is com-
Except for learning experience check, after the learning,
ING DATA pleted normally can be per-
when the ignition switch is turned OFF, no more checks
formed.
can be performed.
The operation of each gear can
GEAR POSITION TEST Allows engagement of each gear individually.
eu
be checked.
Use when returning the gear to
DISENGAGING THE GEAR Allows making all the gears neutral.
neutral.
ADJUST CLUTCH B CAPACITY
ADJUST CLUTCH A CAPACITY

Allows adjustment of the
clutch capacity in 15 stages. e.
• 0: Initial
• 1 – 7: Clutch capacity up
r
• −1 – −7: Clutch capacity
If a shock or slip is large during
gear shift and start-up, adjust the
to
clutch capacity.
down
CLUTCH A TOUCH POINT • 0: Initial
r-s
In the event of a strong creep

• 1 – 7: Move the clutch touch
Allows adjustment of the power, poor start-up response, or
point closer.
CLUTCH B TOUCH POINT clutch touch point in 15 stages. excess start-up shock, adjusts
• −1 – −7: Moves the clutch
t
the clutch touch point.

touch point farther.
.g
Used when the clutch learning

value is returned to the previous
w
learning value upon the request

WRITE PREVIOUS CLUTCH The clutch touch point learning value can be returned to the pre-
from a customer (when the cus-
w
LEARNING VALUE vious learning value.

tomer prefers the previous set-
ting than the current learned
w
driving feeling, for example).

DELETE GEAR POSITION The gear position learning value can be erased and returned to
LEARNING VALUE the initial value.
The clutch A learning value can be erased and returned to the
initial value.
DELETE CLUTCH A LEARNING CAUTION:
VALUE If the clutch learning values is erased at a time other than a
transmission replacement, the previous learning values
can no longer be resumed.
The clutch B learning value can be erased and returned to the Always erase the previous trans-
initial value. mission learning value, when the
DELETE CLUTCH B LEARNING CAUTION: transmission is replaced.*1
VALUE If the clutch learning values is erased at a time other than a
transmission replacement, the previous learning values
can no longer be resumed.
The clutch engagement pressure correction value can be
erased and returned to the initial value.
ERASE CLTCH ENGGMNT CAUTION:
PRSSR CRRCTN If only TCM is replaced, since a new TCM has no memory
of the clutch engagement pressure correction value, it may
require the clutch A/B capacity adjustment.
TM-54
Items Function or item Application
A
By checking the proportion of the
The transmission fluid temperature frequency can be confirmed
count in each range, it can be
SHOW OIL TEMP HISTORY in 5 stages, providing the information of the temperature range
used as information to judge
used.
whether hard driving occurs. B
• Clutch A Protection 1, 2, 3, 4*2
• Clutch B Protection 1, 2, 3, 4*2
HIGH OIL TEMP WARNING
HISTORY • Clutch Overheat Protection History 1*3 C
• Line Pressure Loss History*4
• High Oil Temp Protection History 1, 2, 3*5
• *1: If the learning value is erased, the transmission warning light blinks. TM
• *2: Refer to the “Clutch protection history”.
• *3: Refer to the “Clutch overheat protection history”.
• *4: Refer to the "Line pressure loss history". E
• *5: Refer to the "High oil temperature Protection History".
Clutch protection history F

• If the clutch temperature increases abnormally, the activation of protection control can be checked. In addi-
tion, because the protection control consists of a few stages, the history is displayed in each stage.
eu
Items Clutch protection 1 Clutch protection 2 Clutch protection 3 Clutch protection 4 G
The transmission warn-
ing lamp is illuminated
Description
and the message “T/M
CLUTCH TEMP HIGH
STOP VEHICLE UNTIL
Performs the engine
r
torque restriction. e. Lowers the upper limit of
the engine torque re- Release the clutch.
H
to
striction.
WARNING TURNS
OFF” appears in the in- I
r-s
formation display.
Clutch tem-
Depending on the clutch temperature increase, the clutch protection control shifts from clutch protection
Operation perature J
1 to 4.
t
conditions (if conditions

.g
either of Stall driving

them is met) condi- Depending on the time from the start of stall driving, the clutch protection control shifts from clutch pro-
w
tection 1 to 4. K
tions*1
w
Cancel conditions When the clutch temperature is lowered and the wide open throttle status continues for a certain period.
Warning light on Exists L
w
Engine torque restriction Does not exist Exists

*1: It is judged as the “stall driving conditions”, if the following conditions are met. Acceleration pedal position: Approx. 0.6/8 or more,
vehicle speed: Approx. 3 km/h (1 MPH) or less M
Clutch overheat protection history

• Shows the operation history of the clutch overheating protection control due to stall driving. Refer to the
“Clutch protection”. N
Line pressure loss history

• Shows the history of abnormal drop of the line pressure. [The line pressure sensor value is 0.2 MPa (2.04
O
kg/cm2, 29 psi) or less]
NOTE:
The possible causes for line pressure drop are as follows.
• Fluid level drop due to oil leakage P
• Poor fluid suction due to deformation of the oil pan or others
High oil temperature protection history
• If the transmission fluid temperature increases abnormally, the activation of protection control can be
checked. In addition, because the protection control consists of a few stages, the history is displayed in each
stage.
TM-55
High oil temperature protection High oil temperature protection High oil temperature protection
Items
history 1 history 2 history 3
The transmission warning lamp is
on and the message “T/M OIL Performs the engine torque re- Lowers the upper limit of the en-
Description TEMP HIGH DECREASE striction and engine speed re- gine torque restriction and engine
SPEED” appears in the informa- striction. speed restriction.
tion display.
As the oil temperature increases, the high oil protection control shifts from the high oil temperature pro-
Operation contents
tection history 1 to 3.
When the oil temperature is lowered and the wide open throttle status continues for a certain period of
Cancel conditions
time.
Warning light on Exists
Engine torque restriction,
Does not exist Exists
engine speed restriction
CAUTION:
• During one driving cycle (ignition switch OFF → ON → OFF), if the “High Oil Temp Protection His-
tory 2” status is reached 3 times, after that the high oil temperature protection remains active.
• When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the high oil temperature protection is deactivated.
CONFIGURATION
eu
Procedure
1. Apply parking brake.
CAUTION:
r e.
to
r-s

Display Item List
t
.g
Items Function Application

Writes the acquired IP characteristics data to
w
TCM.
• If the transmission is replaced: Write the IP
w
characteristics of replaced transmission to

TCM that is not replaced.
w
• If TCM is replaced: Write the IP characteristics

of transmission that is not replaced to replaced
TCM.
• If both of them are replaced: Write the IP char- The individual variations of the transmission hy-
Write IP Chara acteristics of replaced transmission to re- draulic parts are read into TCM to stabilize the
placed TCM. control.
CAUTION:
• The “write IP characteristics” can only be
performed once in one driving cycle (the
ignition switch OFF→ON→OFF).
• If the write IP characteristics cannot be per-
formed, turn the ignition switch OFF→ON
and perform the write IP characteristics
again.
Check the write IP characteristics status.
CAUTION: The write IP characteristics status can be
Read IP Chara Written Data Except for the write experience, nothing can checked when the write IP characteristics is
be checked after the IP writing, if the ignition completed or the writing is not successful.
switch is turned OFF.
TM-56
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS A
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019833
B
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links C
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control unit is connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN-H and CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wir-
ing. Each control unit communicates data but selectively reads required data only. TM
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019834
DTC DETECTION LOGIC E
DTC Self-diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause

When TCM is not transmitting or receiving Harness or connectors F
U1000 CAN communication line CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or (CAN communication line is open or short-
more. ed.)
eu
G
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
e.
If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is performed just before the next test, turn the ignition
switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more, then perform the next test.
r H
to
>> GO TO 2. I
r-s
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION

With CONSULT-III J
t
1. Start the engine and wait for 2 seconds or more.

.g
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”.

Is DTC detected?
w
K
YES >> Go to TM-57, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
w
NO >> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) L
w
INFOID:0000000004019835
1.CHECK DTC WITH TRANSMISSION

M
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 2 seconds.
N
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to XX-XX, "*****".
NO >> GO TO 2.
O
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
P
>> INSPECTION END
TM-57
P0700 TCM
P0700 TCM
• TCM consists of the microcomputer and input/output connectors for signal and power supply.
• TCM controls the transmission by performing the following functions: power supply to the devices connected
to the transmission, operation control for each solenoid valve and actuator, data receiving from each sensor,
receiving of signals from the range sensors, paddle shifter, auto/manual range change switch and communi-
cation (CAN or hard wire) to C/U controlling other devices.
• TCM uses 3 different power supply routes to distribute power supply to each sensor.
Sensor power supply 1 Sensor power supply 2 Sensor power supply 3

• Output shaft speed sensor • Clutch A pressure sensor • Clutch B pressure sensor
• Line pressure sensor • Clutch A speed sensor • Clutch B speed sensor
• 6th-Neutral position sensor • 1st-Reverse position sensor 1
• 2nd-4th position sensor • 1st-Reverse position sensor 2
• Range sensor power supply 1 (Range • 3rd-5th position sensor
sensor No. 0, 1, 3, 5) • Range sensor power supply 2 (Range
sensor No. 2, 4)
eu
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CAUTION:
e.
• Before TCM is replaced, the IP characteristics must be extracted, based on the information read out
from the malfunctioning TCM. For reading out the IP characteristic data, refer to “CONSULT-III GT-R
TCM CONFIGURATION MANUAL”.
r
to
• If no IP characteristic data can be extracted TCM and the transmission assembly must be replaced
as a set.
r-s
DTC Self-diagnosis name DTC detection condition Possible cause

• ECM
A DTC is set if TCM cannot receive the
t
• Harness or connector
.g
ECM receiving malfunction A CAN communication signals from ECM

(CAN communication line is open or short-
for 2 seconds or more.
ed)
w
Receiving of malfunctioning A DTC is set if abnormal engine torque

B
engine torque signal signal is received from ECM.
w
ECM
Receiving of malfunctioning A DTC is set if abnormal engine speed
C
w
engine speed signal signal is received from ECM.

• TCM
A DTC is set if TCM detects DTC P0720
P0700 Sensor power supply voltage D • Harness or connector
and DTC P0872.
(Open in the TCM ground circuit)
A DTC is set if TCM computing unit
E
does not operate normally.
A DTC is set if TCM monitor unit does
F
not operate normally.
TCM internal* TCM
A DTC is set if TCM function unit does
G
A DTC is set if TCM self-shutoff does
H
*: A DTC is displayed when E, F, G or H in the DTC detection conditions is detected.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION
TM-58
P0700 TCM
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION A, B A
With CONSULT-III
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” for the engine DTCs U1000, P0605, P0102, P0103, P010C, B
and P010D.
Without CONSULT-III
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” for the engine DTCs U1000, P0605, P0102, P0103, P010C,
and P010D. C
Is the DTC detected?
NO >> GO TO 3. TM
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION C

With CONSULT-III E
Without CONSULT-III F
2. Check self-diagnosis.
Is DTC P0700 detected?
eu
G
NO >> GO TO 4.
With CONSULT-III
r e.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION D H
to
Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”.
Without CONSULT-III I
r-s
Check self-diagnosis.
Are DTCs P0700, P0720 and P0872 detected?
YES >> Go to TM-60, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". J
t
.g
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION E
w
K
With CONSULT-III
w
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 10 seconds or more.

L
w
Without CONSULT-III
Is DTC P0700 detected? M
NO >> GO TO 6.
N
6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION F
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 1 second or more. O
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 5 seconds or more, then turn it ON again.
3. Repeat the procedure shown in 2 above 5 times.
P
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 1 second or more.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 5 seconds or more, then turn it ON again.
TM-59
P0700 TCM
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION G
With CONSULT-III
1. Shift the shift lever as per the following: P→R→N→A→M positions (Keep the shift lever for 5 seconds or
more at each position).
Without CONSULT-III
1. Shift the shift lever as per the following: P→R→N→A→M positions (Keep the shift lever for 5 seconds or
more at each position).
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION H
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, and wait for 5 seconds or more.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON and wait for 5 seconds or more, then turn it OFF again.
eu
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, and wait for 5 seconds or more.

r e.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON and wait for 5 seconds or more, then turn it OFF again.
to
r-s

t
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)

.g
INFOID:0000000004019838
1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

w
Refer to TM-57, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".

w
Is the inspection result normal?

w
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2.CHECK DTC WITH ECM
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check DTC Detected Item. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ENGINE SPEED
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data Monitor”.
Is the engine speed value 8191?
YES >> Replace ECM.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
TM-60
P0700 TCM
Is the inspection result normal? A
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT B

Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND GROUND TM
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connectors.
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. E
TCM vehicle side harness connector

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal F
3
4
eu
B45 Ground Existed G
7
8
YES >> GO TO 7.
r e. H
to
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I
r-s

Is the inspection result normal? J
t
YES >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-270, "Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
.g

w
K
w
L
w
TM-61
P0705 RANGE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
• There are 2 different power supply systems for the range sensors; the range sensor power supply 1 system
distributes power supply to 4 range sensors (No. 0, No. 1, No. 3, and No. 5) used for the range position rec-
ognition, and the auto/manual range change switch changing between M range and A range. The range
sensor power supply 2 system distributes power supply to 2 range sensors (No. 2 and No. 4) used for the
range position recognition.
• TCM recognizes the shift lever position by combining signals from 6 range sensors used for the range posi-
tion recognition and park position switch.
Park posi- Range sensor

TCM recognized position Shift lever position
tion switch No. 0 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5
P P ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
R R OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
N N OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
A/M A/M OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
eu
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Self-diagnosis name DTC detection condition

r e.
A DTC is set if either of the following statuses
Possible cause
to
is detected consecutively.
1. Any of the range sensors No. 0, No. 1,
Range sensor power supply
No. 3, or No. 5 is stuck to OFF.
r-s
1 system malfunction
2. Any of the range sensors other than
those detected in 1 above is stuck to • Range sensor
OFF. • Harness or connector
t
.g
A DTC is set if either of the following statuses (Open or shorted in the range sensor cir-
is detected consecutively. cuit)
1. Either of the range sensors No. 2 or No.
w
Range sensor power supply

P0705 4 is stuck to OFF.
2 system malfunction
2. Any of the range sensors other than
w
those detected in 1 above is/are stuck

to OFF.
w
• Range sensor
A DTC is set if 2 or more of the following sen- • Park position switch
sors and switch are stuck to ON or OFF con- • Harness or connector
Control device malfunction secutively: Range sensors No. 0, No. 1, No. (Open or shorted in the range sensor cir-
2, No. 3, No. 4 or No. 5, and park position cuit)
switch. (Open or shorted in the park position
switch circuit)

>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III
2. Shift the shift lever as per the following: P→R→N→A positions (Keep the shift lever for 5 seconds or more
at each position).
TM-62
3. Shift the shift lever as per the following: A→N→R→P positions (Keep the shift lever for 5 seconds or more
at each position). A
4. Repeat the procedure shown in 2 and 3 above 2 times.
Without CONSULT-III B
at each position).
3. Shift the shift lever as per the following: A→N→R→P positions (Keep the shift lever for 5 seconds or more C
at each position).
5. Check self-diagnosis. TM
NO >> INSPECTION END E
Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019841
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION F

2. Check ground connections B14 and B31 and ground cable connections. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in
eu
XX-XX, "*****". G
e.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H
2.CHECK TCM OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT (PART 1)

r
to
Check voltage between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals. I
r-s

Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal J
t
.g
Ignition switch ON 5V
25
Ignition switch OFF 0V
B45 4
w
K
26
w

Is the inspection result normal? L
w
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Go to TM-194, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
3.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT M
2. Check voltage between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals.
N
TM-63

Connector Terminal
Shift lever: P position 0V
27
Other than the above 5V
Shift lever: R position 0V
33
Shift lever: N position 0V
35
B45 4
Shift lever: R, N position 0V
38
Shift lever: N, A, M position 0V
43
Shift lever: A, M position 0V
44
YES >> GO TO 4.
eu
NO >> GO TO 5.
r e.
to
YES >> GO TO 9.
r-s
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CONTROL DEVICE (RANGE SENSOR) (PART 1)
t
2. Disconnect TCM harness connectors and control device harness connector.

.g
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and control device vehicle side
harness connector terminals.
w
TCM vehicle side harness connector Control device vehicle side harness connector
w
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
w
25 16
26 15
27 5
33 8
B45 B20 Existed
35 10
38 23
43 21
44 12
YES >> GO TO 6.
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
TM-64
TCM vehicle side harness connector A

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
25
26
B
27
33 C
B45 Ground Not existed
35
38
43 TM
44
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CONTROL DEVICE (RANGE SENSOR) AND GROUND F
Check continuity between control device vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
eu
Control device vehicle side harness connector G
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
e.
3
B20 Ground Existed H
6 r
to
YES >> GO TO 8. I
r-s

J
t
.g

YES >> Replace control device assembly. Refer to TM-272, "Exploded View".
w
K
w
1. Connect TCM harness connectors. L

w
TCM vehicle side harness connector Voltage (Ap- M

Condition
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal prox.)
Ignition Shift lever: P position 0V

B46 89 B45 4 switch N
ON Other than the above 5V

YES >> GO TO 10. O
10.CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
P
2. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
TM-65

Ground Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
Shift lever: P position Existed
B46 89 Ground
Other than the above Not existed
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH
1. Disconnect park position switch harness connector.
2. Check park position switch. Refer to TM-67, "Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) (GT-R certi-
YES >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND PARK POSITION SWITCH (PART 1)
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and park position switch vehicle side
harness connector terminal.
eu
TCM vehicle side harness connector Park position switch vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
e.
B46 89 B122 r 1 Existed
to
YES >> GO TO 13.
r-s

t
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
.g

w
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
w
B46 89 Ground Not existed

w
YES >> GO TO 14.

14.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PARK POSITION SWITCH AND GROUND
Check continuity between park position switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Park position switch vehicle side harness connector

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B122 2 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 15.
15.CHECK SHIFT POSITION
Check shift position. Refer to “INSPECTION” in TM-268, "Inspection and Adjustment".
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> Adjust shift position. Refer to “ADJUSTMENT” in TM-268, "Inspection and Adjustment".
TM-66
16.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

>> INSPECTION END B

Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)
INFOID:0000000004019842
C
1.CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH (PART 1)
Check continuity between park position switch connector terminals.
TM
Park position switch connector
Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
E
Parking lever: P position. Existed
B122 1 2
Other than the above positions. Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 2.
eu
2.CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH (PART 2) G
Check continuity between park position switch connector terminal and ground.

Connector Terminal
r e. Ground Continuity
H
to
B122 1 Ground Not existed I
r-s

YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-67
P0706 RANGE SENSOR
P0706 RANGE SENSOR
• The range sensors are installed on the control device and the park position switch on the transmission,
detecting the shift lever position.
• TCM recognizes the shift lever position by combining signals from 6 range sensors used for the range posi-
tion recognition and park position switch.
Park posi- Range sensor

TCM recognized position Shift lever position
tion switch No. 0 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5
P P ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
R R OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
N N OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
A/M A/M OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
eu
• Range sensor
e.
A DTC is set if any of the following sensors • Park position switch
and switch is/are stuck to ON or OFF consec- • Harness or connector
Range sensors / park posi-
P0706 utively: Range sensors No. 0, No. 1, No. 2, (Open or shorted in the range sensor cir-
tion switch malfunction
r
to
No. 3, No. 4 or No. 5, and park position cuit)
switch. (Open or shorted in the park position
switch circuit)
r-s

t
.g
w
w
>> GO TO 2.
w
With CONSULT-III
at each position).
3. Shift the shift lever as per the following: A→N→R→P positions (Keep the shift lever for 5 seconds or more
at each position).
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

2. Check ground connections B14 and B31 and ground cable connections. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in
XX-XX, "*****".
TM-68
P0706 RANGE SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A
Check voltage between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals.
B
Connector Terminal
C
25
B45 4
Ignition switch ON 5V TM
26
E
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT F
eu
G
Connector Terminal
27 r e.
Shift lever: P position
Other than the above
0V
5V
H
to
Shift lever: R position 0V
33 I
r-s
Shift lever: N position 0V

35
Other than the above 5V J
t
B45 4
.g
Shift lever: R, N position 0V

38
w
K
Shift lever: N, A, M position 0V
43
w

Shift lever: A, M position 0V L
w
44
YES >> GO TO 4. M
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT N
YES >> GO TO 9. O
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
2. Disconnect TCM harness connectors and control device harness connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and control device vehicle side
TM-69
P0706 RANGE SENSOR
Continuity
25 16
26 15
27 5
33 8
B45 B20 Existed
35 10
38 23
43 21
44 12
YES >> GO TO 6.
eu
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
e.
25
26 r
27
to
33
r-s
35
38
t
43
.g
44
w
YES >> GO TO 7.
w

7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CONTROL DEVICE (RANGE SENSOR) AND GROUND
w
Check continuity between control device vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
Control device vehicle side harness connector

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
3
B20 Ground Existed
6
YES >> GO TO 8.
YES >> Replace control device assembly. Refer to TM-272, "Exploded View".
1. Connect TCM harness connectors.
TM-70
P0706 RANGE SENSOR
A
TCM vehicle side harness connector Voltage (Ap-
Condition
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal prox.)
Ignition Shift lever: P position 0V B

B46 89 B45 4 switch
ON Other than the above 5V

YES >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT TM

E
Ground Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
F
Shift lever: P position Existed
B46 89 Ground
eu
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH
1. Disconnect park position switch harness connector.
r e. H
to
2. Check park position switch. Refer to TM-67, "Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) (GT-R certi-
I
r-s

YES >> GO TO 12. J
t

.g

w
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and park position switch vehicle side K
w
TCM vehicle side harness connector Park position switch vehicle side harness connector L
w
Continuity
B46 89 B122 1 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 13.
N
O
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B46 89 Ground Not existed P
YES >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PARK POSITION SWITCH AND GROUND
Check continuity between park position switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
TM-71
P0706 RANGE SENSOR
Park position switch vehicle side harness connector

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 15.
Check shift position. Refer to “INSPECTION” in TM-268, "Inspection and Adjustment".
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> Adjust shift position. Refer to “ADJUSTMENT” in TM-268, "Inspection and Adjustment".
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Park Position Switch) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)
eu
INFOID:0000000004019846

Check continuity between park position switch connector terminals. r e.
to
Connector Terminal
r-s
Parking lever: P position. Existed

B122 1 2
Other than the above positions. Not existed
t

.g
YES >> GO TO 2.
w

w
Check continuity between park position switch connector terminal and ground.
w

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
TM-72
P0710 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A
• The fluid temperature sensor detects the transmission oil temperature in the oil pan. B
• The fluid temperature sensor converts the transmission oil temperature into output voltage and transmits the
signal to TCM.
• The fluid temperature sensor uses a thermistor and its electrical resistance varies as the temperature varies.
The electrical resistance decreases as the temperature increases. C
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0700 is detected, first diagnose the DTC P0700. Refer to TM-58, "DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN
E
dealer)".

• A DTC is set if the fluid temperature sensor F
voltage value received by TCM is more • Fluid temperature sensor
Fluid temperature sensor than 2,654 mV. • Harness or connector
P0710
eu
system voltage • A DTC is set if the fluid temperature sensor (Open or shorted in the fluid temperature G
voltage value received by TCM is less than sensor circuit)
39 mV.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION r e. H
to
switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more, then perform the next test. I
r-s
>> GO TO 2.
J
t
.g
With CONSULT-III
w
1. Start the engine and run at idle for 5 seconds or more. K

w
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine and run at idle for 5 seconds or more. L
w
YES >> Go to TM-73, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". M
N
2. Check ground connections B31 and ground cable connections. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in XX-XX, O
"*****".
YES >> GO TO 2. P
2.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT (PART 1)
2. Check resistance between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals.
TM-73
TCM vehicle side harness connector Resistance (Ap-

Condition
Connector Terminal prox.)
Transmission oil temperature: 20°C (68°F) 6.36 – 6.68 kΩ

B46 87 91 Transmission oil temperature: 50°C (122°F) 2.17 – 2.23 kΩ
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
87
91
eu
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Disconnect transmission unit harness connectors. r e.
Check fluid temperature sensor. Refer to TM-75, "Component Inspection (Fluid Temperature Sensor)
to
(GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
r-s
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (PART 1)
t
.g
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and transmission unit vehicle side
w
w
TCM vehicle side harness connector Transmission unit vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
w
87 45
B46 B50 Existed
91 46
YES >> GO TO 6.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
87
91
YES >> GO TO 7.
TM-74
A
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection (Fluid Temperature Sensor) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) B
INFOID:0000000004019850
1.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (PART 1) C

Check resistance between transmission unit harness connector terminals.
Transmission unit harness connector Resistance (Ap-

Condition TM

B50 45 46 Transmission oil temperature: 50°C (122°F) 2.17 – 2.23 kΩ E
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (PART 2)
eu
G
Check continuity between transmission unit harness connector terminal and ground.
Transmission unit harness connector

Connector Terminal
H
to
I
r-s

J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-75
P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR FUNCTION
• The fluid temperature sensor detects the transmission oil temperature in the oil pan.
• The fluid temperature sensor converts the transmission oil temperature into output voltage and transmits the
signal to TCM.
• The fluid temperature sensor uses a thermistor and its electrical resistance varies as the temperature varies.
The electrical resistance decreases as the temperature increases.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
dealer)".

• A DTC is set if TCM detects the fluid tem-
perature sensor value of 160°C (320°F) or
more for a certain period of time.
eu
perature sensor value of 0°C (32°F) or
more and less than 20°C (68°F) for a cer- • Fluid temperature sensor
Fluid temperature sensor tain period of time. • Harness or connector
e.
P0711
malfunction judgment • A DTC is set if TCM detects the fluid tem- (Open or shorted in the fluid temperature
perature sensor value of −20°C (−4°F) or
r sensor circuit)
more, or less than 0°C (32°F) for a certain
to
period of time.
r-s
perature sensor value of less than −20°C

(−4°F) for a certain period of time.

t
.g

w
w
>> GO TO 2.
w

With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine and run at idle for 8 minutes or more.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine and run at idle for 8 minutes or more.

2. Check ground connections B31 and ground cable connections. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in XX-XX,
"*****".
YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-76
2.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT (PART 1) A

B
Condition
C
Transmission oil temperature: 80°C (176°F) 0.86 – 0.89 kΩ TM
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4. E

Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. F

Ground Continuity
eu
Connector Terminal G
87
e.
91
H
Is the inspection result normal? r
YES >> GO TO 7.
to
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
4.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
r-s
1. Disconnect transmission unit harness connectors.

2. Check fluid temperature sensor. Refer to TM-78, "Component Inspection (Fluid Temperature Sensor) J
t

.g

w
YES >> GO TO 5. K
w
L
w
TCM vehicle side harness connector Transmission unit vehicle side harness connector M
Continuity
87 45
B46 B50 Existed N
91 46
YES >> GO TO 6. O
P

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
87
91
TM-77
YES >> GO TO 7.
YES >> Replace transmission assembly. Refer to TM-291, "Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN
dealer)".
Component Inspection (Fluid Temperature Sensor) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)
INFOID:0000000004019854

Check resistance between transmission unit harness connector terminals.

Condition
eu
YES >> GO TO 2.
r e.
to
r-s

t
Ground Continuity
.g
Connector Terminal
w

w

w
TM-78
P0715 CLUTCH A SPEED SENSOR
A
• The clutch A speed sensor detects the 2nd counter gear speed. The clutch A speed sensor converts the 2nd B
counter gear speed into pulse signal and transmits the signal to TCM.
• TCM calculates the revolution speed or the clutch A (even gear) based on the signal from the clutch A speed
sensor.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC TM

A DTC is set if the status 1 or 2 below is de- E
tected with sleeve A1 or A2 engaged in an
even gear.
1. The difference between the actual out-
put shaft speed and the output shaft • Clutch A speed sensor F
Clutch A speed pulse signal speed converted from the clutch A • Harness or connector
P0715
compatibility speed is 1,000 rpm or more. (Open or short in the clutch A speed sen-
2. The difference between the vehicle sor circuit)
eu
speed signal (meter) (CAN signal) and G
the output shaft speed converted from
the clutch A speed is 1,000 rpm or
e.
more.
H
r
to
CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed. I
r-s
J
t
.g
>> GO TO 2.
w
K
w
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. L
w
2. Select “RANGE”, “GEAR” and “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data Monitor”.

3. Run the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
M
RANGE :M
GEAR :4
ENGINE SPEED : 1,500 rpm or more
N
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. O
Shift lever : M range

P
Gear :4
Engine speed : 1,500 rpm or more
TM-79

"*****".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Connector Terminal
B46 76 4
YES >> GO TO 3.
eu
3.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Start engine.
r e.
to
r-s
Connector Terminal
t
.g
• M range, 2nd gear

B46 72 4
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
w
w
NNDIA0061ZZ
w

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (CLUTCH A SPEED SENSOR) (PART 1)
Continuity
68 29
76 28
TM-80
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (CLUTCH A SPEED SENSOR) (PART 2)
B
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
C
68
76 TM
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E

Refer to XX-XX, "*****". F
eu
dealer)". G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-81
P0720 OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
• The output shaft speed sensor detects the front reduction gear speed. The output shaft speed sensor con-
verts the front reduction gear speed into pulse signal and transmits the signal to TCM.
• The vehicle speed signal (meter) is transmitted via the CAN communication from the ABS actuator and elec-
tric unit (control unit) through the combination meter to TCM. TCM calculates the output shaft speed based
on the vehicle speed signal (meter) and uses it for the diagnosis of each speed sensor and as a backup sig-
nal.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is detected, first diagnose the DTC U1000. Refer to TM-57, "DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN
dealer)".
eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-82
DTC Self-diagnosis name DTC detection condition Possible cause A

A DTC is set if the status 1 or 2 below is
detected with an even gear engaged.
1. The difference between the output
B
shaft speed sensor value and the
output shaft speed converted from
the vehicle speed signal (meter)
A (CAN signal) is 1,000 rpm or more. C
shaft speed converted from the
vehicle speed signal (meter) (CAN • Combination meter
signal) and the output shaft speed • ABS actuator and electric unit (control TM
converted from the clutch A speed unit)
Output shaft speed CAN sig- is 1,000 rpm or more. • Wheel sensor
nal compatibility *1 A DTC is set if the status 1 or 2 below is (CAN communication line is open or short- E
detected with an odd gear engaged. ed)
1. The difference between the output (Open or short in the wheel speed sensor
shaft speed sensor value and the circuit)
output shaft speed converted from F
B (CAN signal) is 1,000 rpm or more.
eu
shaft speed converted from the G
vehicle speed signal (meter) (CAN
signal) and the output shaft speed
e.
converted from the clutch B speed
P0720 is 1,000 rpm or more. H
r
to
detected with an even gear engaged.
1. The difference between the output I
r-s

C J
(CAN signal) is 1,000 rpm or more.
t
2.
.g
The difference between the output

w
the clutch A speed is 1,000 rpm or • Output shaft speed sensor K

Output shaft speed pulse more. • Harness or connector
w
signal compatibility *2 A DTC is set if the status 1 or 2 below is (Open or shorted in the output shaft speed
sensor circuit) L
w
detected with an odd gear engaged.

the vehicle speed signal (meter) M
D
(CAN signal) is 1,000 rpm or more.
N
the clutch B speed is 1,000 rpm or
more.
• *1: A DTC is displayed when A or B in the DTC detection conditions is detected. O
• *2: A DTC is displayed when C or D in the DTC detection conditions is detected.

P
CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.
TM-83
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION A, B
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “RANGE”, “GEAR” or “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data Monitor”.
3. Run the vehicle and maintain the following status for 5 seconds or more.
RANGE :M
GEAR :3
Without CONSULT-III

Gear :3
eu
NO >> GO TO 3.
e.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION C, D
r
to
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “RANGE”, “GEAR” or “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data Monitor”.
r-s
RANGE :M
t
GEAR :4
.g

w
Without CONSULT-III
w
w

Gear :4

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER
With CONSULT-III
TM-84
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “METER/M&A”.
Is DTC detected? A
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) B
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON. C
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check DTC Detected Item. Refer to XX-XX, "*****". TM
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
"*****".
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 5.
eu
5.CHECK TCM OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT G
Connector
Terminal
r e. Condition Voltage (Approx.)
H
to
Ignition switch ON 5V I
B47 105 4
r-s

YES >> GO TO 6. J
t
.g

w
K
1. Start engine.
w

L
w

Connector Terminal
• M range, 1st gear

B47 106 4 N
NNDIA0055ZZ
O
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 8. P
>> INSPECTION END

8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR) (PART 1)
TM-85
Continuity
105 1
107 8
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR) (PART 2)

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
105
eu
107
YES >> GO TO 10.
r e.
to
r-s

t
dealer)".
.g

w
w
w
TM-86
P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
A
• The engine speed signal (CAN signal) is transmitted from ECM to TCM via CAN communication. B
• The engine speed signal (pulse signal) is transmitted from ECM to TCM via the hard wire. TCM uses the
engine speed signal (pulse signal) for the diagnosis of each speed signal and as a backup signal.
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019862 C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE: TM
dealer)".
E
A DTC is set if the engine speed (CAN
Harness or connector
signal) is less than 200 rpm when the
A (CAN communication line is open or short- F
engine speed (pulse signal) is 700 rpm
ed)
or more.
• Clutch A speed sensor
eu
A DTC is set if the difference between • Harness or connector G
the engine speed (CAN signal) and (Open or short in the clutch A speed sen-
Engine speed CAN signal B
clutch A speed sensor value is 1,000 sor circuit)
e.
compatibility* rpm or more with clutch A engaged. (CAN communication line is open or short-
ed) H
P0725 r • Clutch B speed sensor
to
A DTC is set if the difference between • Harness or connector
the engine speed (CAN signal) and (Open or short in the clutch B speed sen- I
C
clutch B speed sensor value is 1,000 sor circuit)
r-s
rpm or more with clutch B engaged. (CAN communication line is open or short-
ed)
J
t
A DTC is set if the engine speed (pulse

Harness or connector
.g
Engine speed pulse signal signal) is less than 500 rpm when the
D (Open or short in the circuit between ECM
compatibility engine speed (CAN signal) is 1,000 rpm
and TCM)
w
or more. K
*: A DTC is displayed when A, B or C in the DTC detection conditions is detected.
w

L
w
CAUTION:
1.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION M
N
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION A
O
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine and run at idle for 5 seconds or more.
P
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION D
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “RANGE” and “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data Monitor”.
TM-87
2. Maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
RANGE :P
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION C
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “RANGE”, “GEAR”, “ACCEL POSI SEN 1” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor”.
RANGE :M
GEAR :1
VEHICLE SPEED : 20 km/h (13 MPH) or more
eu
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION B
With CONSULT-III
r e.
to
r-s
RANGE ：M
GEAR ：2
t
.g
ACCEL POSI SEN 1 ：0.0/8

VEHICLE SPEED ：35 km/h (22 MPH) or more
w

w

w


YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CLUTCH A SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CLUTCH B SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
TM-88
YES >> GO TO 4.
B
"*****".
C
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT TM
1. Start engine.
E
Connector Terminal
1 V* F
At idle
NOTE:
eu
The pulse period changes de- G
pending on the idle speed.
After en-
B45 31 4
gine
warming
up
r e. 1 V*
JMBIA0076GB H
to
I
r-s
Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
J
t
.g
JMBIA0077GB
*: Average voltage value of pulse waveform (The correct waveform is measured with an oscilloscope)
w
K
w
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 6.
L
w
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND ECM (PART 1)

2. Disconnect TCM harness connectors and ECM harness connectors. M
3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and transmission unit vehicle
side harness connector terminals.
N
TCM vehicle side harness connector ECM vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
B45 31 M107 113 Existed O
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND ECM (PART 2)
TM-89

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 8.
>> INSPECTION END
eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-90
P0729 SLEEVE A1 FUNCTION
A
• The 6th-Neutral position sensor is installed on the actuator control valve and detects the sleeve A1 position. B
• The 6th-Neutral position sensor converts the sleeve A1 position into output voltage and transmits the signal
to TCM.
• The sleeve A1 has its oil passage secured by the shift solenoid valve 1 and shift solenoid valve 2 when the
sequence solenoid valve is ON and is driven by the axis A feed pressure solenoid valve. The 6th gear is C
selected or deselected depending on the operation of the sleeve A1.
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
E
• If DTC P0700 is detected, first diagnose the DTC P0700. Refer to TM-58, "DTC Logic (GT-R certified NIS-
SAN dealer)".
SAN dealer)". F
DTC Self-diagnosis name DTC Detection Condition Possible causes
eu
• A DTC is set if the 6th-Neutral posi-
• 6th-Neutral position sensor
G
tion sensor voltage value received by
• TCM
6th-Neutral position sensor TCM is more than 4,700 mV.
A • Harness or connector
e.
voltage • A DTC is set if the 6th-Neutral posi-
(Open or short in the 6th-Neutral position H
tion sensor voltage value received by
sensor circuit)
TCM is less than 300 mV.
r
to
A DTC is set if the status of the sleeve • 6th-Neutral position sensor
Sleeve A1 function (long A1 position of more than 1.3 mm (0.051 • Shift solenoid valve 1 I
B
time release) in) is detected for a certain period when • Shift solenoid valve 2
r-s
the sleeve A1 position target is neutral. • Sequence solenoid valve

P0729 • Axis A feed pressure solenoid valve
• Harness or connector J
t
(Open or short in the 6th-Neutral position

.g
sensor circuit)
A DTC is set if the status of the sleeve (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 1
w
A1 position of less than 1.8 mm (0.071 circuit) K

Sleeve A1 function (long
C in) is detected for a certain period of (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 2
time engagement)
w
time when the sleeve A1 position target circuit)

is on the 6th gear side. (Open or short in the sequence solenoid
L
w
valve circuit)
(Open or short in the axis A feed pressure
solenoid valve circuit)
M
TM-91
• 6th-Neutral position sensor
• Shift solenoid valve 1
A DTC is set if the status of the sleeve • Sequence solenoid valve
A1 position of more than 1.7 mm (0.067 • Harness or connector
in) or less than −1.6 mm (−0.063 in) is (Open or short in the 6th-Neutral position
Sleeve A1 function (poor
D detected for a certain period of time sensor circuit)
neutral hold)
when the sleeve A1 position target is (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 1
neutral with the sleeve A2 engaged in circuit)
the 2nd or 4th gear. (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 2
circuit)
(Open or short in the sequence solenoid
valve circuit)
• Axis A feed pressure solenoid valve
• Sleeve A1 related part
A DTC is set if the sleeve A1 position is
Sleeve A1 function (poor en- 7.1 mm (0.28 in) or less and 1.7 mm
E (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 1
gaged gear) (0.067 in) or more when the sleeve A1
circuit)
position target is on the 6th gear side.
(Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 2
P0729 circuit)
eu
1.
r e.
detected with the sleeve A1 engaged in
the 6th gear.
The difference between the clutch
to
A speed calculated from the out- • Clutch A speed sensor
put shaft speed sensor value and • Sleeve A1 related part
r-s
F clutch A speed sensor value is • Harness or connector

1,000 rpm or more. (Open or short in the clutch A speed sen-
Sleeve A1 function (gear re- 2. The difference between the clutch sor circuit)
t
lease)* A speed calculated from the vehi-

.g
cle speed signal (meter) (CAN sig-

nal) and clutch A speed sensor
value is 1,000 rpm or more.
w

w
A DTC is set if the sleeve A1 and A2 po- • Sleeve A1 related part

G sitions are not in 6th gear during driving • Harness or connector
w
in the 6th gear. (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 1

circuit)
*: A DTC is displayed when F or G in the DTC detection conditions is detected.

CAUTION:
• If CONSULT-III is not available, “TM-96, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)"” must
be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• If CONSULT-III is not available, never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before complet-
ing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction.
• Be careful of the driving speed.
1.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 1)
Is CONSULT-III available?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 13.
TM-92
>> GO TO 3. A
With CONSULT-III B
2. Select “FLUID TEMP” in “Data Monitor”.
Is the oil temperature −20°C (−4°F) or more? C
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Warm up the transmission.
4.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 4) TM
With CONSULT-III
Select “READ CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING DATA” in “Work support”.
Is the “6-N learning experienced” YES? E
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Perform “CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING”.
F
5.CONFIRMATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
eu
Select “SLEEVE A1 POSI” in “Data Monitor”. G
Is the numeral value of the “SLEEVE A1 POSI” in the range between −1.7 and 1.8 mm (−0.067 and 0.071 in)?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 7.
6.CONFIRMATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 2) r e. H
to
With CONSULT-III I
1. Shift the shift lever to N position.
r-s

3. Select “GEAR POSITION TEST” in “Work support”.
4. Select “GEAR6”. J
t
CAUTION:
.g
Never select “GEAR2”, “GEAR4” or “GEAR N”.

w
Does the sleeve A1 operate? K

YES >> GO TO 11.
w

7.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION A L
w
With CONSULT-III
M
N
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION B
With CONSULT-III O
1. Shift the shift lever to the N position.
3. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”. P
Is DTC P0729 or DTC P0795 detected?
YES-1 (DTC P0729 is detected).>>Go to TM-96, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
YES-2 (DTC P0795 is detected).>>Go to TM-155, "DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
NO >> GO TO 9.
With CONSULT-III
TM-93
1. Shift the shift lever to the P position and run at idle for 1 minute or more.
NO >> GO TO 10.
10.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION D
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “RANGE” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor”.
2. With the vehicle stationary, maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
RANGE :M
GEAR :1
NO >> GO TO 11.
11.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION C AND E
eu
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “RANGE”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor”.
RANGE
GEAR
:M
:5
r e.
to
r-s

t
NO >> GO TO 12.
.g
12.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION F AND G

w
With CONSULT-III
w
1. Select “RANGE”, “GEAR”, “ENGINE SPEED” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor”.
w
RANGE :M
GEAR :6
>> GO TO 14.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Check “TRANS OIL TEMP” on multi-function display.
TM-94
Is the oil temperature −20°C (−4°F) or more?
YES >> GO TO 15. A
B
Without CONSULT-III
C
NO >> GO TO 16.
TM
Without CONSULT-III
1. Shift the shift lever to the N position. E
Is DTC P0729 or DTC P0795 detected? F
YES-1 (DTC P0729 is detected).>>Go to TM-96, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
NO >> GO TO 17.
eu
G
e.
Without CONSULT-III
H
r
to
I
r-s
NO >> GO TO 18.
18.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION D J
t
.g
Without CONSULT-III
w
K
w

Gear :1
L
w
NO >> GO TO 19.
19.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION C AND E
N
Without CONSULT-III
Shift lever : M range O

Gear :5
Vehicle speed : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
P
NO >> GO TO 20.
20.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION F AND G
Without CONSULT-III
TM-95

Gear :6
1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 1 CIRCUIT

YES >> GO TO 2.
eu
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SEQUENCE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
r e.
to
r-s

YES >> GO TO 4.
t
.g
4.CHECK AXIS A FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

w

w
YES >> GO TO 5.
w

YES >> GO TO 6.
"*****".
YES >> GO TO 7.
TM-96

Connector Terminal
B46 74 4 B
YES >> GO TO 9. C
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY
Refer to TM-172, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". TM

1. Start engine. F
eu
Condition Voltage (Approx.) G
Connector Terminal
Engine
e.
Shift lever: P, R, N position
running 2.19 – 2.88 V H
B46 70 4 1st gear, 2nd gear, 3rd gear, 4th gear
While
r
to
driving 5th gear, 6th gear
0.68 – 1.76 V
(Other than M range, R mode) I
r-s

YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 11. J
t

.g

w
K
w
>> INSPECTION END

11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (4TH-NEUTRAL POSITION SENSOR) L
w
(PART 1)
2. Disconnect TCM harness connectors and transmission unit harness connectors. M
N
Continuity
66 25 O
74 23
P
YES >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (4TH-NEUTRAL POSITION SENSOR)
(PART 2)
TM-97

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
66
74
YES >> GO TO 13.
dealer)".
eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-98
P0731 SLEEVE B1 FUNCTION
A
• The 1st-Reverse position sensor 1 and 1st-Reverse position sensor 2 are installed on the actuator control B
valve and detect the sleeve B1 position.
• The 1st-Reverse position sensor 1 and 1st-Reverse position sensor 2 convert the sleeve B1 position into
output voltage and transmit the signal to TCM.
• The sleeve B1 has its oil passage secured by the shift solenoid valve 3 and shift solenoid valve 2 when the C
sequence solenoid valve is OFF and is driven by the axis B feed pressure solenoid valve. The 1st gear and
reverse gear are selected or deselected depending on the operation of the sleeve B1.
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
NOTE:
SAN dealer)".
• If DTC P2765 is detected, first diagnose the DTC P2765. Refer to TM-187, "DTC Logic (GT-R certified NIS- F
SAN dealer)".
eu
G
• A DTC is set if the 1st-Reverse posi- • 1st-Reverse position sensor 1
tion sensor 1 or 1st-Reverse position • 1st-Reverse position sensor 2
e.
sensor 2 voltage value received by • TCM
1st-Reverse position sensor TCM is more than 4,700 mV. • Harness or connector H
A
voltage • A DTC is set if the 1st-Reverse posi- (Open or short in the 1st-Reverse position
r
tion sensor 1 or 1st-Reverse position sensor 1 circuit)
to
sensor 2 voltage value received by (Open or short in the 1st-Reverse position
TCM is less than 300 mV. sensor 2 circuit)
I
r-s
• A DTC is set if the status of the sleeve

B1 position of more than 1.3 mm
(0.051 in) is detected for a certain pe- J
t
• 1st-Reverse position sensor 1

.g
riod of time when the sleeve B1 posi-

Sleeve B1 function (long tion target is neutral.
B • Shift solenoid valve 4
time release) • A DTC is set if the status of the sleeve
w
P0731 • Sequence solenoid valve K

B1 position of less than −1.3 mm (−
• Axis B feed pressure solenoid valve
0.051 in) is detected for a certain pe-
w
(Open or short in the 1st-Reverse position
tion target is neutral. L
w
sensor 1 circuit)
B1 position of less than 1.8 mm (0.071 circuit)
C in) is detected for a certain period of (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 4
time when the sleeve B1 position target circuit) M
Sleeve B1 function (long is on the 1st gear side. (Open or short in the sequence solenoid
time engagement)*1 valve circuit)
A DTC is set if the status of the sleeve
(Open or short in the axis B feed pressure
B1 position of more than 1.8 mm (0.071 N
D in) is detected for a certain period of
time when the sleeve B1 position target
is on the reverse gear side.
O
TM-99
B1 position of more than 1.7 mm (0.067 • Harness or connector
in) or less than −1.7 mm (−0.067 in) is (Open or short in the 1st-Reverse position
Sleeve B1 function (poor
E detected for a certain period of time sensor 1 circuit)
neutral hold)
when the sleeve B1 position target is (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 3
neutral with sleeve B2 engaged in the circuit)
3rd or 5th gear. (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 4
circuit)
valve circuit)
A DTC is set if the sleeve B1 position is • Shift solenoid valve 3
7.1 mm (0.28 in) or less and 1.7 mm • Shift solenoid valve 4
F
(0.067 in) or more when the sleeve B1 • Axis B feed pressure solenoid valve
position target is on the 1st gear side. • Sleeve B1 related part
Sleeve B1 function (poor • Harness or connector
A DTC is set if the sleeve B1 position is (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 3
gear engagement)*2 circuit)
−1.7 mm (−0.067 in) or less and −7.1
G mm (−0.28 in) or more when the sleeve (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 4
B1 position target is on the reverse gear circuit)
eu
side. (Open or short in the sequence solenoid
valve circuit)
A DTC is set if the following statuses 1
P0731 and 2 are detected.
1.
e.
r
B speed calculated from the out-
to
• Clutch B speed sensor
put shaft speed sensor value and
• Sleeve B1 related part
clutch B speed sensor value is
H • Harness or connector
r-s
1,000 rpm or more.

(Open or short in the clutch B speed sen-
2. The difference between the clutch
sor circuit)
B speed calculated from the vehi-
t
Sleeve B1 function (gear re- cle speed signal (meter) (CAN sig-
.g
lease)*3 nal) and clutch B speed sensor

w
A DTC is set if the sleeve B1 and B2 po- • Shift solenoid valve 3

I sitions are not in 1st gear during driving • Shift solenoid valve 4
w
in the 1st gear. • Sleeve B1 related part

w
A DTC is set if the sleeve B1 and B2 po- (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 3
J sitions are not in reverse during driving circuit)
in the reverse gear. (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 4
circuit)
A DTC is set if the difference between
the sleeve B1 position calculated from
1st-Reverse position sensor the 1st-Reverse position sensor 1 value
K (Open or short in the 1st-Reverse position
compatibility and the sleeve B1 position calculated
sensor 1 circuit)
from the 1st-Reverse position sensor 2
(Open or short in the 1st-Reverse position
is 6 mm or more.
sensor 2 circuit)
• *2: A DTC is displayed when F or G in the DTC detection conditions is detected.
• *3: A DTC is displayed when H, I, or J in the DTC detection conditions is detected.

CAUTION:
• If CONSULT-III is not available, “TM-104, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)"”
must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
TM-100
1.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 1) A
YES >> GO TO 2. B
NO >> GO TO 15.
C
TM
>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III E
Is the oil temperature −20°C (−4°F) or more? F
YES >> GO TO 4.
eu
4.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 4) G
With CONSULT-III
e.
Select “READ CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING DATA” in “Work support”. H
Is the “1-R learning experienced” YES? r
YES >> GO TO 5.
to
NO >> Perform “CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING”. I
r-s
With CONSULT-III
Select “SLEEVE B1 POSI 1” and “SLEEVE B1 POSI 2” in “Data Monitor”. J
t
.g
Is the numeral value of the “SLEEVE B1 POSI 1” and “SLEEVE B1 POSI 2” in the range between −1.8 and 1.8
mm (−0.071 and 0.071 in)?
w
YES >> GO TO 6. K
NO >> GO TO 8.
w
6.CONFIRMATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 2) L

w
With CONSULT-III
2. Start the engine. M
4. Select “GEAR R”.
CAUTION:
Never select “GEAR3”, “GEAR5” or “GEAR N”. N
Does the sleeve B1 operate?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Go to TM-104, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". O
With CONSULT-III P
2. Select “GEAR1”.
CAUTION:
Never select “GEAR3”, “GEAR5” or “GEAR N”.
YES >> GO TO 12.
TM-101
8.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION A AND K

With CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 9.
With CONSULT-III
YES-1 (DTC P0731 is detected)>>Go to TM-104, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
YES-2 (DTC P2713 is detected)>>Go to TM-176, "DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
NO >> GO TO 10.
With CONSULT-III
eu
e.
r
to
NO >> GO TO 11.
r-s
With CONSULT-III
1. Run the vehicle in 2nd gear of M range for 2 seconds or more.
t

.g

w

NO >> GO TO 12.
w
12.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION D, G AND J

w
With CONSULT-III
1. Shift the shift lever to the R position and wait for 10 seconds or more.
NO >> GO TO 13.
13.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION C, F AND I
With CONSULT-III
1. Shift the shift lever to the A position and wait for 10 seconds or more.
NO >> GO TO 14.
With CONSULT-III
TM-102
RANGE :M A
GEAR :1
VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more B
YES >> Go to TM-104, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". C
NO >> INSPECTION END.
15.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 2) TM
E
>> GO TO 16.
F
Without CONSULT-III
eu
Is the oil temperature −20°C (−4°F) or more? G
YES >> GO TO 17.
e.
H
17.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION A AND K
r
to
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 5 seconds or more. I
r-s
YES >> Go to TM-104, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". J
t
NO >> GO TO 18.
.g

w
K
Without CONSULT-III
w

L
w
YES-2 (DTC P2713 is detected)>>Go to TM-176, "DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". M
NO >> GO TO 19.
19.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE N
Without CONSULT-III
O
P
NO >> GO TO 20.
Without CONSULT-III
TM-103
NO >> GO TO 21.
21.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION D, G AND J
Without CONSULT-III
1. Shift the shift lever to the R position and wait for 10 seconds or more.
NO >> GO TO 22.
22.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION C, F AND I
Without CONSULT-III
1. Shift the shift lever to the A position and wait for 10 seconds or more.
NO >> GO TO 23.
Without CONSULT-III
eu
e.
Gear :1 r
to
r-s

t

.g

w

w

w

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK AXIS B FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
YES >> GO TO 5.
TM-104
5.CHECK CLUTCH B SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT A

Is the inspection result normal? B
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION C
"*****". TM
YES >> GO TO 7.
Check voltage between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals. F
Connector Terminal
eu
G
71
e.
B46 4
Ignition switch ON 5V H
75 r
to
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 9.
r-s
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY J
t
.g

w
K
w
9.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT (1ST-REVERSE POSITION SENSOR 1) L

w
1. Start engine.
M
Connector Terminal
Engine Shift lever: P, N position 2.19 – 2.88 V N

running Shift lever: R position 0.68 – 1.76 V
B46 67 4 1st gear 3.34 – 4.41 V

While O
2nd gear, 3rd gear, 4th gear, 5th gear,
driving 6th gear 2.19 – 2.88 V
(Other than M range, R mode)
Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 11.
TM-105
>> INSPECTION END
11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (1ST-REVERSE POSITION SENSOR 1)
(PART 1)
2. Disconnect TCM harness connectors and transmission unit harness connectors.
Continuity
67 4
94 5
YES >> GO TO 12.
(PART 2)
eu
e.
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal r
67
to
r-s
94
YES >> GO TO 13.
t
.g

13.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT (1ST-REVERSE POSITION SENSOR 2)
w
1. Connect TCM harness connectors and transmission unit harness connectors.

w
2. Start engine.
w

Connector Terminal
Engine Shift lever: P, N position 2.19 – 2.88 V

B46 79 4 1st gear 0.68 – 1.76 V

While 2nd gear, 3rd gear, 4th gear, 5th gear,
driving 6th gear 2.19 – 2.88 V
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 14.
(PART 1)
TM-106
TCM vehicle side harness connector Transmission unit vehicle side harness connector A
Continuity
69 32
B
79 31
YES >> GO TO 15.
15.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (1ST-REVERSE POSITION SENSOR 2) TM
(PART 2)
E
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F
69
eu
79 G
YES >> GO TO 16.
r e. H
to
Refer to XX-XX, "*****". I
r-s
dealer)". J
t

.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-107
• The 2nd-4th position sensor is installed on the actuator control valve and detects the sleeve A2 position.
• The 2nd-4th position sensor converts the sleeve A2 position into output voltage and transmits the signal to
TCM.
• The sleeve A2 has its oil passage secured by the shift solenoid valve 1 and shift solenoid valve 2 when the
sequence solenoid valve is OFF and is driven by the axis A feed pressure solenoid valve. The 2nd gear and
4th gear are selected or deselected depending on the operation of the sleeve A2.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
SAN dealer)".
SAN dealer)".
eu
• A DTC is set if the 2nd-4th position
• 2nd-4th position sensor
sensor voltage value received by
• TCM
2nd-4th position sensor volt- TCM is more than 4,700 mV.
e.
age • A DTC is set if the 2nd-4th position
(Open or short in the 2nd-4th position sen-
sor circuit)
r
to
A2 position of more than 1.3 mm
(0.051 in) is detected for a certain pe-
r-s
riod of time when the sleeve A2 posi-

Sleeve A2 function (long tion target is neutral. • 2nd-4th position sensor
B
time release) • A DTC is set if the status of the sleeve • Shift solenoid valve 1
t
A2 position of less than −1.3 mm (− • Shift solenoid valve 2

.g
P0732 0.051 in) is detected for a certain pe- • Sequence solenoid valve
riod of time when the sleeve A2 posi- • Harness or connector
w
tion target is neutral. (Open or short in the 2nd-4th position sen-

sor circuit)
A DTC is set if the status of the sleeve
w

A2 position of less than 1.8 mm (0.071
circuit)
C in) is detected for a certain period of
w

time when the sleeve A2 position target
circuit)
Sleeve A2 function (long is on the 2nd gear side.
time engagement)*1 A DTC is set if the status of the sleeve valve circuit)
A2 position of more than −1.8 mm (−
D 0.071 in) is detected for a certain period
of time when the sleeve A2 position tar-
get is on the 4th gear side.
TM-108
A
• 2nd-4th position sensor
A DTC is set if the status of the sleeve • Sequence solenoid valve B
A2 position of more than 1.7 mm (0.067 • Harness or connector
in) or less than −1.7 mm (−0.067 in) is (Open or short in the 2nd-4th position sen-
Sleeve A2 function (poor
E detected for a certain period of time sor circuit)
neutral hold)
when the sleeve A2 position target is (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 1 C
neutral with the sleeve A1 engaged in circuit)
the 6th gear. (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 2
circuit)
(Open or short in the sequence solenoid TM
valve circuit)
A DTC is set if the sleeve A2 position is • Shift solenoid valve 1
7.0 mm (0.276 in) or less and 1.7 mm • Shift solenoid valve 2 E
F
(0.067 in) or more when the sleeve A2 • Axis A feed pressure solenoid valve
position target is on the 2nd gear side. • Sleeve A2 related part
Sleeve A2 function (poor • Harness or connector
A DTC is set if the sleeve A2 position is (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 1 F
−1.7 mm (−0.067 in) or less and −7.1
G mm (−0.28 in) or more when the sleeve (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 2
A2 position target is on the 4th gear circuit)
eu
P0732 (Open or short in the axis A feed pressure G
side.
and 2 are detected.
1.
e.
r
A speed calculated from the out-
H
to
• Clutch A speed sensor
• Sleeve A2 related part I
clutch A speed sensor value is
r-s
1,000 rpm or more.

(Open or short in the clutch A speed sen-
sor circuit)
A speed calculated from the vehi-
J
t
Sleeve A2 function (gear re- cle speed signal (meter) (CAN sig-
.g
lease)*3 nal) and clutch A speed sensor

w
A DTC is set if the sleeve A1 and A2 po- • Shift solenoid valve 1 K

I sitions are not in 2nd gear during driving • Shift solenoid valve 2
w
in the 2nd gear. • Sleeve A2 related part

L
w
A DTC is set if the sleeve A1 and A2 po- (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 1
J sitions are not in 4th gear during driving circuit)
in the 4th gear. (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 2
circuit)
M
• *3: A DTC is displayed when H, I, or J in the DTC detection conditions is detected. N
CAUTION:
• If CONSULT-III is not available, “TM-114, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)"” O
ing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. P
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 16.
TM-109

>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
YES >> GO TO 4.
With CONSULT-III
Select “READ CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING DATA” in “Work support”.
Is the “2-4 learning experienced” YES?
YES >> GO TO 5.
eu
NO >> Perform “CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING”.
With CONSULT-III
Select “SLEEVE A2 POSI” in “Data Monitor”. r e.
Is the numeral value of the “SLEEVE A2 POSI” in the range between −1.8 and 1.8 mm (−0.071 and 0.071 in)?
to
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 8.
r-s

With CONSULT-III
t
.g

w

w
CAUTION:
Never select “GEAR6” or “GEAR N”.
w
Does the sleeve A2 operate?

YES >> GO TO 7.
With CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
Never select “GEAR6” or “GEAR N”.
Does the sleeve A2 operate?
YES >> GO TO 12.
With CONSULT-III
TM-110
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION B A
With CONSULT-III
1. Shift the shift lever to the N position. B
C
NO >> GO TO 10.
TM
With CONSULT-III
1. Shift the shift lever to the P position and run at idle for 1 minute or more. E
YES-1 (DTC P0795 is detected)>>Go to TM-155, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". F
NO >> GO TO 11.
eu
G
With CONSULT-III
1. Run the vehicle in 5th gear of M range for 2 seconds or more.
r e. H
to
NO >> GO TO 12. I
r-s
12.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION C AND F

With CONSULT-III J
t

.g
2. Run the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 second.
w
K
RANGE :M
w
GEAR :1
ENGINE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
L
w

NO >> GO TO 13.
13.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION H AND I
N
With CONSULT-III
O
RANGE :M
GEAR :2
ENGINE SPEED : 3,000 rpm or more P
NO >> GO TO 14.
TM-111
14.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION D AND G

With CONSULT-III
1. Select “RANGE”, “GEAR”, and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor”.
RANGE :M
GEAR :3
NO >> GO TO 15.
15.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION J
With CONSULT-III
RANGE :M
eu
GEAR :4
Is DTC P0732 detected? r e.
to
r-s
Without CONSULT-III
t
2. Check "TRANS OIL TEMP" on multi-function display.

.g

w
YES >> GO TO 17.

w

w
Without CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 18.
Without CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 19.
Without CONSULT-III
TM-112
Is DTC P0795 or DTC P0797 detected? A
NO >> GO TO 20. B
Without CONSULT-III C
1. Run the vehicle in 5th gear of M range for 2 seconds or more.
TM
NO >> GO TO 21.
21.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION C AND F E
Without CONSULT-III
1. Run the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 second.
F
Gear :1
eu
Engine speed : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more G
NO >> GO TO 22.
r e.
YES >> Go to TM-114, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". H
to
22.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION H AND I I
r-s
Without CONSULT-III
J
t

.g
Gear :2
w
K
w
Is DTC P0732 detected? L
w

NO >> GO TO 23.
23.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION D AND G M
Without CONSULT-III
N
Gear :3
Vehicle speed : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more O
Is DTC P0732 detected? P
NO >> GO TO 24.
24.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION J
Without CONSULT-III
TM-113

Gear :4

YES >> GO TO 2.
eu
YES >> GO TO 3.
e.
r
to
YES >> GO TO 4.
r-s

t

.g

w
YES >> GO TO 5.
w

w

YES >> GO TO 6.
"*****".
YES >> GO TO 7.
TM-114

Connector Terminal
B46 81 4 B
YES >> GO TO 9. C
NO >> GO TO 8.
Refer to TM-172, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". TM

1. Start engine. F
eu
Condition Voltage (Approx.) G
Connector Terminal
Engine
e.
Shift lever: P, R, N position 2.19 – 2.88 V
running H
1st gear, 2nd gear 0.68 – 1.76 V
r
to
B46 85 4 3rd gear, 4th gear
While 3.34 – 4.41 V
(Other than M range, R mode) I
driving
r-s
5th gear, 6th gear

2.19 – 2.88 V
t
.g
YES >> GO TO 10.

NO >> GO TO 11.
w
K
w

L
w
>> INSPECTION END

11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (2ND-4TH POSITION SENSOR) (PART 1)
M
side harness connector terminals. N
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
81 16
P
85 17
YES >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (2ND-4TH POSITION SENSOR) (PART 2)
TM-115

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
81
85
YES >> GO TO 13.
dealer)".
eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-116
A
• The 3rd-5th position sensor is installed on the actuator control valve and detects the sleeve B2 position. B
• The 3rd-5th position sensor converts the sleeve B2 position into output voltage and transmits the signal to
TCM.
• The sleeve B2 has its oil passage secured by the shift solenoid valve 3 and shift solenoid valve 2 when the
sequence solenoid valve is ON and is driven by the axis B feed pressure solenoid valve. The 3rd gear and C
5th gear are selected or deselected depending on the operation of the sleeve B2.
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
E
SAN dealer)".
SAN dealer)". F
eu
• A DTC is set if the 3rd-5th position
• 3rd-5th position sensor
G
• TCM
3rd-5th position sensor volt- TCM is more than 4,700 mV.
e.
age • A DTC is set if the 3rd-5th position
(Open or short in the 3rd-5th position sen- H
sor circuit)
r
to
B2 position of more than 1.3 mm I
(0.051 in) is detected for a certain pe-
r-s

Sleeve B2 function (long tion target is neutral.
B • Shift solenoid valve 4
time release) • A DTC is set if the status of the sleeve J
t
• Sequence solenoid valve

B2 position of less than −1.3 mm (−
.g
P0733 • Axis B feed pressure solenoid valve

0.051 in) is detected for a certain pe-
w
(Open or short in the 3rd-5th position sen- K

tion target is neutral.
sor circuit)
w
B2 position of less than 2.0 mm (0.079 circuit)

C in) is detected for a certain period of (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 4 L
w
time when the sleeve B2 position target circuit)

Sleeve B2 function (long is on the 3rd gear side. (Open or short in the sequence solenoid
time engagement)*1 valve circuit)
A DTC is set if the status of the sleeve M
B2 position of more than −2.0 mm (−
D 0.079 in) is detected for a certain period
of time when the sleeve B2 position tar-
get is on the 5th gear side. N
TM-117
B2 position of more than 1.9 mm (0.075 • Harness or connector
in) or less than −1.9 mm (−0.075 in) is (Open or short in the 3rd-5th position sen-
Sleeve B2 function (poor
E detected for a certain period of time sor circuit)
neutral hold)
when the sleeve B2 position target is (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 3
neutral with the sleeve B1 engaged in circuit)
the 1st or reverse gear. (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 4
circuit)
valve circuit)
7.2 mm (0.283 in) or less and 1.9 mm • Shift solenoid valve 4
F
(0.075 in) or more when the sleeve B2 • Axis B feed pressure solenoid valve
position target is on the 3rd gear side. • Sleeve B2 related part
Sleeve B2 function (poor • Harness or connector
−1.9 mm (−0.075 in) or less and −7.5
G mm (−0.295 in) or more when the (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 4
sleeve B2 position target is on the 5th circuit)
eu
P0733 (Open or short in the axis B feed pressure
gear side.
and 2 are detected.
1.
e.
r
B speed calculated from the out-
to
• Clutch B speed sensor
• Sleeve B2 related part
clutch B speed sensor value is
r-s
1,000 rpm or more.

(Open or short in the clutch B speed sen-
sor circuit)
B speed calculated from the vehi-
t
Sleeve B2 function (gear re- cle speed signal (meter) (CAN sig-
.g
lease)*3 nal) and clutch B speed sensor

w

I not in 3rd gear during driving in the 3rd • Shift solenoid valve 4
w
gear. • Sleeve B2 related part

w
J not in 5th gear during driving in the 5th circuit)
gear. (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 4
circuit)
• *3: A DTC is displayed when H, I or J in the DTC detection conditions is detected.

CAUTION:
• If CONSULT-III is not available, “TM-123, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)"”
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 16.
TM-118
2.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 1) A

B
>> GO TO 3.
C
With CONSULT-III
TM
YES >> GO TO 4.
E
With CONSULT-III
Select “READ CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING DATA” in “Work support”. F
Is the “3-5 learning experienced” YES?
YES >> GO TO 5.
eu
NO >> Perform “CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING”. G
With CONSULT-III
Select “SLEEVE B2 POSI” in “Data Monitor”. r e.
Is the numerical value of the “SLEEVE B2 POSI” in the range between −2.0 and 2.0 mm (−0.079 and 0.079
H
to
in)?
I
YES >> GO TO 6.
r-s
NO >> GO TO 8.
6.CONFIRMATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 2) J
t
.g
With CONSULT-III
w
2. Start the engine. K

w
CAUTION: L
w
Never select “GEAR1”, “GEAR R” or “GEAR N”.

YES >> GO TO 7. M
With CONSULT-III N
CAUTION: O
Never select “GEAR1”, “GEAR R” or “GEAR N”.
YES >> GO TO 12. P
With CONSULT-III
TM-119
NO >> GO TO 9.
With CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 10.
With CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 11.
eu
With CONSULT-III
1.
2. e.
Select “RANGE”, “GEAR”, or “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor”.
Run the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
r
to
RANGE :M
r-s
GEAR :2
t
.g

w
NO >> GO TO 12.
w
With CONSULT-III
w
1. Run the vehicle in 1st gear of M range for 2 seconds or more.

NO >> GO TO 13.
With CONSULT-III
RANGE :M
GEAR :3
NO >> GO TO 14.
TM-120
14.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION D AND G A

With CONSULT-III
1. Select “RANGE”, “GEAR” or “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor”.
2. Run the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more. B
RANGE :M
GEAR :4
C
Is DTC P0733 detected? TM
NO >> GO TO 15.
15.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION J E
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “RANGE”, “GEAR” or “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor”.
2. Run the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more. F
RANGE :M
eu
GEAR :5 G
Is DTC P0733 detected? r e.
H
to
I
r-s
switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more, then perform the next test. J
t
.g
>> GO TO 17.
w
K
w
Without CONSULT-III
1. Turn the ignition switch ON. L
w
2. Check "TRANS OIL TEMP" on multi-function display.

YES >> GO TO 18. M
Without CONSULT-III N
Is DTC P0733 detected? O
NO >> GO TO 19.
19.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION B P
Without CONSULT-III
TM-121
NO >> GO TO 20.
Without CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 21.
Without CONSULT-III

Gear :2
eu
NO >> GO TO 22.
Without CONSULT-III
r e.
to
1. Run the vehicle in 1st gear of M range for 2 seconds or more.
r-s

t
NO >> GO TO 23.
.g

w
Without CONSULT-III
w

w
Gear :3
NO >> GO TO 24.
24.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION D AND G
Without CONSULT-III

Gear :4
TM-122
NO >> GO TO 25.
25.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION J A
Without CONSULT-III
1. Run the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more. B
Gear :5
C
Is DTC P0733 detected? TM
E

F
YES >> GO TO 2.
eu
G
e.
r H
to
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I
r-s

Refer to TM-145, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". J
t

.g
YES >> GO TO 4.
w
K
w

L
w

YES >> GO TO 5.
M
5.CHECK CLUTCH B SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION O

P
"*****".
YES >> GO TO 7.
TM-123

Connector Terminal
B46 88 4
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
1. Start engine.
eu
Connector Terminal
Engine
e.
running 2.19 – 2.88 V
1st gear
r
to
B46 92 4 2nd gear, 3rd gear
While 0.68 – 1.76 V
driving
r-s
4th gear, 5th gear, 6th gear

3.34 – 4.41 V
t
.g
YES >> GO TO 10.

NO >> GO TO 11.
w
w

w
>> INSPECTION END

11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (3RD-5TH POSITION SENSOR) (PART 1)
Continuity
84 11
92 10
YES >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (3RD-5TH POSITION SENSOR) (PART 2)
TM-124

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
84
B
92
YES >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT TM
E
dealer)".
F
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-125
P0745 CLUTCH A SOLENOID VALVE
• The clutch A solenoid valve is installed on the front control module and controls the clutch A (a clutch for
even number gears) with the current signal from TCM.
• The clutch A solenoid valve is a N/L type (normal low) in which no control oil pressure is built up when no
current flows through the coil.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
dealer)".

A DTC is set if the clutch A solenoid valve • Clutch A solenoid valve
Clutch A solenoid valve cur- monitor current value is less than 0.05 A • Harness or connector
P0745
rent when the clutch A solenoid valve target cur- (Open or short in the clutch A solenoid
rent value is more than 0.2 A. valve circuit)
eu
switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more, then perform the next test. r e.
to
>> GO TO 2.
r-s

With CONSULT-III
t

.g

w

w
RANGE ：M
w
GEAR ：2
Without CONSULT-III
Shift lever ：M range

Gear ：2

TM-126
"*****". A
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B
2.CHECK CLUTCH A SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT (PART 1)
C

Condition TM
Transmission oil temperature: 20°C (68°F) 4.6 – 5.0 Ω

B47 121 126 Transmission oil temperature: 50°C (122°F) 5.1 – 5.6 Ω E
YES >> GO TO 3. F
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK CLUTCH A SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT (PART 2)
eu
G
e.
Ground Continuity H
to
121
126 I
r-s

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4. J
t
.g
4.CHECK CLUTCH A SOLENOID VALVE

w
1. Disconnect transmission unit harness connectors. K

2. Check clutch A solenoid valve. Refer to TM-128, "Component Inspection (Clutch A Solenoid Valve) (GT-R
w

w
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (CLUTCH A SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 1) M
N
Continuity
121 37
O
B47 B50 Existed
126 38
Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (CLUTCH A SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 2)
TM-127

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
121
126
YES >> GO TO 7.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Clutch A Solenoid Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)
INFOID:0000000004019895
1.CHECK CLUTCH A SOLENOID VALVE (PART 1)

Check the resistance between transmission unit harness connector terminals.
eu
Condition
B50 37 38
r e.
Transmission oil temperature: 20°C (68°F)
4.6 – 5.0 Ω
5.1 – 5.6 Ω
to
r-s
YES >> GO TO 2.
t
2.CHECK CLUTCH A SOLENOID VALVE (PART 2)

.g
w

w
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
w
37
38
TM-128
P0746 CLUTCH A SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
A
The current signal from TCM controls the oil pressure to be applied to the clutch A (a clutch for even number B
gears) engaging or releasing of the clutch A.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0840 is detected, first diagnose the DTC P0840. Refer to TM-163, "DTC Logic (GT-R certified NIS- TM
SAN dealer)".
DTC Self-diagnosis item DTC detection condition Possible cause

E
• Clutch A solenoid valve
• Clutch A pressure sensor
A DTC is set if the clutch A pressure • Clutch A oil passage
Monitor clutch A solenoid sensor value is higher than the clutch A • Harness or connector F
A pressure target value by 0.2 MPa (2.04
valve oil pressure difference (Open or short in the clutch A solenoid
kg/cm2, 29 psi) or more. valve circuit)
(Open or short in the clutch A pressure
eu
sensor circuit) G
• Clutch A solenoid valve
e.
• Axis A feed pressure solenoid valve H
P0746 r • Line pressure solenoid valve
• Oil passage between line pressure and
to
clutch A pressure
A DTC is set if the difference between I
Clutch A solenoid valve oil the engine speed (CAN signal) and
r-s
B (Open or short in the clutch A solenoid

pressure output low clutch A speed sensor value is 1,000
valve circuit)
rpm or more with clutch A.
J
t
sensor circuit)
.g

(Open or short in the line pressure sole-
w
K
noid valve circuit)
w

1.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION L
w
M
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE — DTC DETECTION CONDITION A N
With CONSULT-III
2. Shift the shift lever to the N position. O
5. With the vehicle stationary, maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. P
RANGE :M
GEAR :2
Without CONSULT-III
TM-129

Gear :2
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
2. Run the vehicle and keep the following conditions for at least 5 seconds.
RANGE :M
GEAR :2
eu
Without CONSULT-III
Shift lever
Gear
: M range
:2
r e.
to
Accelerator opening : 0.0/8
r-s
t

.g

w
INFOID:0000000004019898
1.CHECK CLUTCH A SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

w
w

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CLUTCH A PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
TM-130
YES >> GO TO 5.
B
"*****".
C
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT TM
YES >> Replace transmission assembly. Refer to TM-291, "Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN E
dealer)".
F
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-131
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 1
• The shift solenoid valve 1 is installed on the actuator control module and switches the oil passages for the oil
pressure that activates the 6th-Neutral shift actuator operating the sleeve A1 and the 2nd-4th shift actuator
operating the sleeve A2.
• The shift solenoid valve 1 is an ON/OFF type solenoid valve.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• A DTC is set if the shift solenoid valve 1
monitor value is ON when the shift sole- • Shift solenoid valve 1
noid valve 1 command value is OFF. • Harness or connector
P0750 Shift solenoid valve 1 output
• A DTC is set if the shift solenoid valve 1 (Open or short in the shift solenoid valve 1
monitor value is OFF when the shift sole- circuit)
noid valve 1 command value is ON.
eu
CAUTION:
r e.
to
r-s
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (PART 1)
t
With CONSULT-III
.g

2. Shift the shift lever to the A position and run at idle for 5 seconds or more.
w

Without CONSULT-III
w

w
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Run the vehicle in 3rd gear of M range for 5 seconds or more.
Without CONSULT-III

TM-132
2. Check ground connection B31 and ground cable connections. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in XX-XX,
"*****". A
YES >> GO TO 2.
C
2. Check resistance between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Ground Condition TM

B46 49 Ground Transmission oil temperature: 50°C (122°F) 7.3 – 8.3 Ω E
YES >> GO TO 6. F
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 1
eu
G
2. Check shift solenoid valve 1. Refer to TM-134, "Component Inspection (Shift Solenoid Valve 1) (GT-R
e.
H
YES >> GO TO 4.
to
I
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 1) (PART 1)
r-s
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and transmission unit vehicle side
harness connector terminal. J
t
.g
Continuity
w
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal K

w

L
w
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 1) (PART 2) M
TCM vehicle side harness connector N

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
O
YES >> GO TO 6.
P
>> INSPECTION END
TM-133
Component Inspection (Shift Solenoid Valve 1) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)
INFOID:0000000004019905

Check the resistance between transmission unit harness connector terminal and ground.

Ground Condition

B49 13 Ground Transmission oil temperature: 50°C (122°F) 7.3 – 8.3 Ω
eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-134
A
• The shift solenoid valve 2 is installed on the actuator control module and switches the oil passages for the oil B
pressure that activates the 6th-Neutral shift actuator operating the sleeve A1 and the 2nd-4th shift actuator
operating the sleeve A2.
• The shift solenoid valve 2 is a ON/OFF type solenoid valve.
C

• A DTC is set if the shift solenoid valve 2 E
monitor value is OFF when the shift sole- circuit) F
eu
CAUTION: G
e.
r H
to
I
r-s
>> GO TO 2.
J
t
With CONSULT-III
.g

w
3. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”. K

Without CONSULT-III
w

2. Shift the shift lever to the A position and run at idle for 5 seconds or more. L
w
NO >> GO TO 3.
N
With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III O

TM-135
"*****".
YES >> GO TO 2.

Ground Condition

YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.
eu
e.
YES >> GO TO 4.
to
r-s
t
.g
Continuity
w

w

w
YES >> GO TO 5.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END
TM-136
INFOID:0000000004019909 A

Check the resistance between transmission unit harness connector terminal and ground. B

Ground Condition
Connector Terminal prox.) C
TM
YES >> INSPECTION END E
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-137
• The shift solenoid valve 3 is installed on the actuator control module and switches the oil passages for the oil
pressure that activates the 1st-Reverse shift actuator operating the sleeve B1 and the 3rd-5th shift actuator
operating the sleeve B2.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• A DTC is set if the shift solenoid valve 3
monitor value is OFF when the shift sole- circuit)
eu
r e.
to
>> GO TO 2.
r-s
With CONSULT-III
t
2. Shift the shift lever to the R position and run at idle for 5 seconds or more.
.g

Without CONSULT-III
w

w
w

NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III

TM-138
"*****". A
YES >> GO TO 2.
C

Ground Condition TM

B46 51 Ground Transmission oil temperature: 50°C (122°F) 7.3 – 8.3 Ω E
YES >> GO TO 6. F
NO >> GO TO 3.
eu
G
e.
H
YES >> GO TO 4.
to
I
r-s
harness connector terminal. J
t
.g
Continuity
w
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal K

w

L
w
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 3) (PART 2) M
TCM vehicle side harness connector N

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
O
YES >> GO TO 6.
P
>> INSPECTION END
TM-139
INFOID:0000000004019913


Ground Condition

eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-140
A
• The shift solenoid valve 4 is installed on the actuator control module and switches the oil passages for the oil B
pressure that activates the 1st-Reverse shift actuator operating the sleeve B1 and the 3rd-5th shift actuator
operating the sleeve B2.
C

• A DTC is set if the shift solenoid valve 4 E
monitor value is OFF when the shift sole- circuit) F
eu
G
r e. H
to
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (PART 1) I
r-s
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. J
t
.g

Without CONSULT-III
w
1. Start the engine. K

w
Is DTC P0765 detected? L
w

NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (PART 2) M
With CONSULT-III
1. Shift the shift lever to the A position and run at idle for 5 seconds or more. N
Without CONSULT-III
2. Check self-diagnosis. O
NO >> INSPECTION END P

"*****".
TM-141
YES >> GO TO 2.

Ground Condition

YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2. Check shift solenoid valve 4. Refer to TM-142, "Component Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
eu
YES >> GO TO 4.
r e.
to
r-s
Continuity
t
.g

w
YES >> GO TO 5.
w

w

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019917

TM-142
Transmission unit harness connector Resistance (Ap- A

Ground Condition

B

TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-143
P0770 SEQUENCE SOLENOID VALVE
• The sequence solenoid valve is installed on the actuator control module and switches the oil passages for
operating the low speed gear sleeve (sleeve A2 and sleeve B1) and for operating the high speed gear
sleeve (sleeve A1 and sleeve B2).
• The sequence solenoid valve is a ON/OFF type solenoid valve.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• A DTC is set if the sequence solenoid
valve monitor value is ON when the se-
quence solenoid valve command value is • Sequence solenoid valve
Sequence solenoid valve OFF. • Harness or connector
P0770
output • A DTC is set if the sequence solenoid (Open or short in the sequence solenoid
valve monitor value is OFF when the se- valve circuit)
quence solenoid valve command value is
ON.
eu
CAUTION:
1.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION r e.
to
r-s
>> GO TO 2.
t
.g
With CONSULT-III
w

w

Without CONSULT-III
w

NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
TM-144
A
2. Check ground connection B31 and ground cable connections. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in XX-XX, B
"*****".
YES >> GO TO 2. C
2.CHECK SEQUENCE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT TM
E
Ground Condition
Transmission oil temperature: 20°C (68°F) 6.6 – 7.4 Ω F

eu
G
YES >> GO TO 6.
e.
NO >> GO TO 3.
H
3.CHECK SEQUENCE SOLENOID VALVE r
to
2. Check sequence solenoid valve. Refer to TM-146, "Component Inspection (Sequence Solenoid Valve) I
r-s

YES >> GO TO 4. J
t

.g
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (SEQUENCE SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 1)
w
K
w
L
w
Continuity
M
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. N
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (SEQUENCE SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 2)
O
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
P
YES >> GO TO 6.
TM-145
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Sequence Solenoid Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)
INFOID:0000000004019921
1.CHECK SEQUENCE SOLENOID VALVE


Ground Condition

eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-146
P0775 CLUTCH B SOLENOID VALVE
A
• The clutch B solenoid valve is installed on the front control module and controls the clutch B (a clutch for odd B
number gears and reverse) with the current signal from TCM.
• The clutch B solenoid valve is an N/L type (normal low) in which no control oil pressure is built up when no
C

NOTE:
If DTC P0700 is detected, first diagnose the DTC P0700 first. Refer to TM-58, "DTC Logic (GT-R certified NIS-
SAN dealer)".
E
A DTC is set if the clutch B solenoid valve • Clutch B solenoid valve
Clutch B solenoid valve cur- current value is less than 0.05 A when the • Harness or connector F
P0775
rent clutch B solenoid valve target current value is (Open or short in the clutch B solenoid
more than 0.2 A. valve circuit)
eu
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

e.
switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds or more, then perform the next test. r H
to
>> GO TO 2. I
r-s

With CONSULT-III J
t

.g

w
4. Select “RANGE” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor”. K

w
RANGE :M L
w
GEAR :1
Without CONSULT-III M
3. Start the engine. N

O
Gear :1

TM-147
"*****".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CLUTCH B SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT (PART 1)

Condition

B47 123 128 Transmission oil temperature: 50°C (122°F) 5.1 – 5.6 Ω
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK CLUTCH B SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT (PART 2)
eu
e.
Ground Continuity
to
123
128
r-s

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
t
.g
4.CHECK CLUTCH B SOLENOID VALVE

w

2. Check clutch B solenoid valve. Refer to TM-149, "Component Inspection (Clutch B Solenoid Valve) (GT-R
w

w
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (CLUTCH B SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 1)
Continuity
123 42
B47 B50 Existed
128 43
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (CLUTCH B SOLENOID VALVE) (PART 2)
TM-148

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
123
B47 Ground Not existed B
128
YES >> GO TO 7. C
Refer to XX-XX, "*****". TM
>> INSPECTION END

E
Component Inspection (Clutch B Solenoid Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)
INFOID:0000000004019925
F
1.CHECK CLUTCH B SOLENOID VALVE (PART 1)
eu
G
Condition
B50 42 43
r e.
4.6 – 5.0 Ω
5.1 – 5.6 Ω
H
to
I
r-s
YES >> GO TO 2.
t
2.CHECK CLUTCH B SOLENOID VALVE (PART 2)

.g
w
K
w
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
L
w
42
43
N
TM-149
P0776 CLUTCH B SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
The current signal from TCM controls the oil pressure to be applied to the clutch B (a clutch for odd number
gears and reverse) engaging or releasing of the clutch B.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0845 is detected, first diagnose the DTC P0845. Refer to TM-166, "DTC Logic (GT-R certified NIS-
SAN dealer)".
DTC Self-diagnosis item DTC detection condition Possible cause

• Clutch B solenoid valve
• Clutch B pressure sensor
A DTC is set if the clutch B pressure • Clutch B oil passage
Monitor clutch B solenoid sensor value is higher than the clutch B • Harness or connector
A pressure target value by 0.2 MPa (2.04
valve oil pressure difference (Open or short in the clutch B solenoid
kg/cm2, 29 psi) or more. valve circuit)
(Open or short in the clutch B pressure
eu
sensor circuit)
• Clutch B solenoid valve
e.
P0776 r • Line pressure solenoid valve
• Oil passage between line pressure and
to
clutch B pressure
A DTC is set if the difference between
Clutch B solenoid valve oil the engine speed (CAN signal) and
r-s
B (Open or short in the clutch B solenoid

pressure output low clutch B speed sensor value is 1,000
valve circuit)
rpm or more with clutch B.
t
sensor circuit)
.g

(Open or short in the line pressure sole-
w
noid valve circuit)

w

w
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Shift the shift lever to N the position.
RANGE :M
GEAR :1
Without CONSULT-III
2. Shift the shift lever to N the position.
TM-150
4. With the vehicle stationary, maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. A

Gear :1 B
YES >> Go to TM-151, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". C
NO >> GO TO 3.
TM
With CONSULT-III
E
RANGE :M
GEAR :1
ACCEL POSI SEN 1 : 0.0/8 F
eu
G
Without CONSULT-III
Shift lever
Gear
: M range
:1
r e. H
to
Accelerator opening : 0.0/8
Vehicle speed : 20 km/h (13 MPH) or more I
r-s
J
t

.g

w
INFOID:0000000004019928 K
1.CHECK CLUTCH B SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

w
L
w

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M
2.CHECK CLUTCH B PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Refer to TM-167, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". N
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. O
P
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
TM-151
YES >> GO TO 5.
"*****".
YES >> GO TO 6.
dealer)".
eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-152
P0790 SET-UP SWITCH (TRANSMISSION)
A
The set-up switch (transmission) is installed on the cluster lid C and commands the driving mode transition to B
TCM according to a driver's request.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Self-diagnosis name DTC detection condition Possible cause TM

• Set-up switch (transmission)
A DTC is set if TCM detects the set-up switch
Continuation of set-up switch • Harness or connector
P0790 (transmission) ON signal for a certain period
(transmission) ON [Short in the set-up switch (transmission) E
of time.
circuit]

1.CHECK BEFORE OPERATION F
eu
G
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
r e. H
to
1. Start the engine and wait for 1 minute or more.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”. I
r-s

NO >> INSPECTION END J
t
.g

w
K
w

2. Check ground connections B31 and M95. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in XX-XX, "*****". L
w

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SET-UP SWITCH (TRANSMISSION)
1. Disconnect set-up switch (transmission) harness connector.
2. Check set-up switch (transmission). Refer to TM-191, "Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up N
Switch)] (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND SET-UP SWITCH (TRANSMISSION) P
TM-153

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
34
37
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SET-UP SWITCH (TRANSMISSION) AND GROUND
Check continuity between set-up switch (transmission) vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Set-up switch (transmission) vehicle side harness connector

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M73 17 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
eu
>> INSPECTION END r e.

Component Inspection [Set-up Switch (Transmission)] (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)
to
INFOID:0000000004019935
r-s
1.CHECK SET-UP SWITCH (TRANSMISSION)

Check continuity between set-up switch (transmission) connector terminals.
t
.g
Set-up switch (transmission) connector

w
Connector Terminal
With the knob of the set-up switch (transmission)
w
Existed
11 pressed onto the R side
w
M73 17
With the knob of the set-up switch (transmission)
Existed
23 pressed onto the SNOW side
NO >> Replace set-up switch.
TM-154
P0795 AXIS A FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
A
• The axis A feed pressure solenoid valve is installed on the actuator control module and builds up the source B
pressure for the gear operation actuators for even number gears and for the clutch A pressure solenoid
valve based on the signals from TCM. The solenoid valves adjust the source pressure to drive the gears and
clutches.
• The axis A feed pressure solenoid valve is an N/L type (normal low) in which no control oil pressure is built C
up when no current flows through the coil.
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
E
dealer)".
DTC Self-diagnosis name DTC detection condition Possible cause F

A DTC is set if the axis A feed pressure sole-
• Axis A feed pressure solenoid valve
noid valve monitor current value is less than
Axis A feed pressure sole- • Harness or connector
eu
P0795 0.2 A when the axis A feed pressure solenoid G
noid valve current (Open or short in the axis A feed pressure
valve target current value is more than 0.38
A.

r e. H
to
I
r-s
>> GO TO 2. J
t

.g
With CONSULT-III
w
1. Turn the ignition switch ON. K

w
CAUTION:
No shift position indicator in the combination meter blinks. L
w

4. Move the shift lever to the N position and run at idle for 5 seconds or more.
M
Without CONSULT-III
CAUTION: N
No shift position indicator in the combination meter blinks.
4. Move the shift lever to the N position and run at idle for 5 seconds or more.
O
YES >> Go to TM-155, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". P

TM-155
"*****".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AXIS A FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT (PART 1)

Condition

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK AXIS A FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT (PART 2)
eu
e.
Ground Continuity
to
57
62
r-s

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
t
.g
4.CHECK AXIS A FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

w

2. Check axis A feed pressure solenoid valve. Refer to TM-157, "Component Inspection (Axis A Feed Pres-
w
sure Solenoid Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".

w
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (AXIS A FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE) (PART 1)
Continuity
57 14
B46 B49 Existed
62 15
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (AXIS A FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE) (PART 2)
TM-156

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
57
B46 Ground Not existed B
62
YES >> GO TO 7. C
Refer to XX-XX, "*****". TM
>> INSPECTION END

E
Component Inspection (Axis A Feed Pressure Solenoid Valve) (GT-R certified NIS-
SAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019939
F
1.CHECK AXIS A FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (PART 1)
eu
G
Condition
prox.)
e.
Connector Terminal
H
r 3.8 – 4.4 Ω
to
Transmission oil temperature: 80°C (176°F) 4.7 – 5.4 Ω I
r-s

YES >> GO TO 2.
t
2.CHECK AXIS A FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (PART 2)

.g
w
K
w

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
L
w
14
15
N
TM-157
P0797 AXIS A FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
This solenoid valve builds up the source pressure for the gear operation actuators for even number gears and
for the clutch A solenoid valve based on the signals from TCM. The solenoid valves adjust the source pres-
sure to drive the gears and clutches.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0840 is detected, first diagnose the DTC P0840. Refer to TM-163, "DTC Logic (GT-R certified NIS-
SAN dealer)".

• A DTC is set if the clutch A pressure sen- • Axis A feed pressure solenoid valve
sor value is less than 0.4 MPa (4.08 kg/ • Clutch A solenoid valve
cm2, 58 psi) when the axis A feed pressure • Clutch A pressure sensor
• Clutch A oil passage
target value is 0.4 MPa (4.08 kg/cm2, 58
Axis A feed pressure sole- psi) or more.
P0797 (Open or short in the axis A feed pressure
eu
noid valve function • A DTC is set if the clutch A pressure sen-
sor value is more than 0.2 MPa (2.04 kg/
(Open or short in the clutch A solenoid
cm2, 29 psi) when the axis A feed pressure valve circuit)
psi) or less. r e.
target value is 0.1 MPa (1.02 kg/cm2, 14.5 (Open or short in the clutch A pressure
sensor circuit)
to
r-s
t
.g
>> GO TO 2.
w
With CONSULT-III
w

w

4. Move the shift lever in the P position, run at idle for 1 minute or more.
Without CONSULT-III
4. Move the shift lever in the P position, run at idle for 1 minute or more.

YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-158
2.CHECK CLUTCH A SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT A

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CLUTCH A PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT C
TM
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION E
"*****". F
YES >> GO TO 5.
eu
G
e.
H
to
dealer)".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-159
P0827, P0828 AUTO/MANUAL RANGE CHANGE SWITCH
The auto/manual range change switch 1 and Auto/Manual range change switch 2 are installed on the control
device and commands a transition to M range or A range according to the driver's request.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• Auto/manual range change switch 1
A DTC is set if TCM simultaneously detects • Range sensor power supply 1 system
Range switching signal com- the OFF signal from the auto/manual range • Harness or connector
P0827
patibility Low change switch 1 and OFF signal from the (Open in the auto/manual range change
auto/manual range change switch 2. switch 1)
(Open in the auto/manual range change
switch 2)
eu
A DTC is set if TCM simultaneously detects • Range sensor power supply 1 system
Range switching signal com- the ON signal from the auto/manual range • Harness or connector
P0828
patibility High change switch 1 and ON signal from the (Short in the auto/manual range change
r e.
auto/manual range change switch 2. switch 1)
(Short in the auto/manual range change
switch 2)
to
r-s

t
.g
>> GO TO 2.
w

w
With CONSULT-III
w

2. Shift the shift lever to the A position and run at idle for 1 minute or more.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
2. With the shift lever pressed to the M position side, run at idle for 1 minute or more.

TM-160
2. Check ground connection B31. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in XX-XX, "*****".
Is the inspection result normal? A
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUTO/MANUAL RANGE CHANGE SWITCH CIRCUIT (PART 1) B

2. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals.
C
Connector Terminal
TM
The shift lever is pressed onto the M position side Not existed
25 23
Other than the above Existed
B45
The shift lever is pressed onto the M position side Existed E
25 28
F
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK AUTO/MANUAL RANGE CHANGE SWITCH CIRCUIT (PART 2)
eu
G

Connector Terminal
H
to
23
I
r-s
28
t
YES >> GO TO 7.
.g
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.CHECK AUTO/MANUAL RANGE CHANGE SWITCH
w
K
1. Disconnect control device harness connector.
w
2. Check auto/manual range change switch. Refer to TM-162, "Component Inspection (Auto/Manual Range
L
w
Change Switch) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".

YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CONTROL DEVICE (AUTO/MANUAL RANGE CHANGE
SWITCH) (PART 1)
N
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and control device vehicle side har-
ness connector terminals.
O
Continuity
23 20 P
28 24
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND CONTROL DEVICE (AUTO/MANUAL RANGE CHANGE
TM-161
SWITCH) (PART 2)

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
23
28
YES >> GO TO 7.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Auto/Manual Range Change Switch) (GT-R certified NISSAN
dealer) INFOID:0000000004019948
eu
1.CHECK AUTO/MANUAL RANGE CHANGE SWITCH
e.
Check continuity between control device harness connector terminals.

r
to
Connector Terminal
r-s
The shift lever is pressed onto the M position side Not existed
16 20
Other than the above Existed
B20
The shift lever is pressed onto the M position side Existed
t
16 24
.g

w

w

w
TM-162
P0840 CLUTCH A PRESSURE SENSOR
A
• The clutch A pressure sensor is installed on the front control module and detects the pressure applied to the B
clutch A.
• The clutch A pressure sensor converts the pressure applied to the clutch A into output voltage and transmits
the signal to TCM. TCM uses this signal in calculations for control switching or other functions.
• The clutch A pressure sensor output voltage varies depending on the pressure variations. The voltage C
increases as the pressure increases.
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
E
dealer)".

• A DTC is set if the clutch A pressure sen-
sor voltage value received by TCM is more
• TCM
eu
Clutch A pressure sensor than 4,700 mV. G
P0840 • Harness or connector
voltage • A DTC is set if the clutch A pressure sen-
sor voltage value received by TCM is less
sensor circuit)
than 90 mV.

r e. H
to
If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is performed just before the next test, turn the ignition I
r-s
J
t
>> GO TO 2.
.g

w
With CONSULT-III K
w

Without CONSULT-III L
w

Is the oil temperature −10°C (14°F) or more? M
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE N
With CONSULT-III
2. Shift the shift lever to the N position. O
CAUTION:
3. Start the engine. P
4. With the shift lever in the N position and run at idle for 5 seconds or more.
Without CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
TM-163

"*****".
YES >> GO TO 2.

eu
Connector Terminal
B47 97 4
e.
YES >> GO TO 4.
to
NO >> GO TO 3.
r-s

t
.g
w

w
1. Start engine.
w

Connector Terminal
Engine
Shift lever: P, R, or N position
running
B47 98 4 0.38 – 0.64 V
While
1st gear, 3rd gear, 5th gear
driving
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (CLUTCH A PRESSURE SENSOR) (PART 1)
TM-164
side harness connector terminals. A
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B
97 40
C
99 47
YES >> GO TO 7. TM
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (CLUTCH A PRESSURE SENSOR) (PART 2)
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. E

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal F
97
eu
G
99
YES >> GO TO 8.
r e. H
to
I
r-s

YES >> Replace transmission assembly. Refer to TM-291, "Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN J
t
dealer)".
.g

w
K
w
L
w
TM-165
P0845 CLUTCH B PRESSURE SENSOR
• The clutch B pressure sensor is installed on the front control module and detects the pressure applied to the
clutch B.
• The clutch B pressure sensor converts the pressure applied to the clutch B into output voltage and transmits
the signal to TCM. TCM uses this signal in calculations for control switching or other functions.
• The clutch B pressure sensor output voltage varies depending on the pressure variations. The voltage
increases as the pressure increases.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
dealer)".

• A DTC is set if the clutch B pressure sen-
sor voltage value received by TCM is more
• TCM
eu
Clutch B pressure sensor than 4,700 mV.
P0845 • Harness or connector
voltage • A DTC is set if the clutch B pressure sen-
sor voltage value received by TCM is less
sensor circuit)
than 90 mV.

r e.
to
r-s
t
>> GO TO 2.
.g

w
With CONSULT-III
w

Without CONSULT-III
w

Is the oil temperature −10°C (14°F) or more?
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
TM-166
5. Check self-diagnosis. A
NO >> INSPECTION END B
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION C

TM
"*****".
YES >> GO TO 2. E
Check voltage between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals. F

eu
Connector Terminal G
B47 102 4
e.
H
YES >> GO TO 4.
to
NO >> GO TO 3. I
r-s

t
.g
w
K
w
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals. L
w

Connector Terminal M
Engine
Shift lever: P, R, or N position
running
B47 103 4 0.38 – 0.64 V
While N
2nd gear, 4th gear, 6th gear
driving
YES >> GO TO 5. O
NO >> GO TO 6.
P
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (CLUTCH B PRESSURE SENSOR) (PART 1)
TM-167
Continuity
102 51
104 53
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (CLUTCH B PRESSURE SENSOR) (PART 2)

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
102
eu
104
YES >> GO TO 8.
r e.
to
r-s

t
dealer)".
.g

w
w
w
TM-168
P0872, P0873 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR
A
• The line pressure sensor is installed on the actuator control module and detects the line pressure. B
• The line pressure sensor converts the line pressure into output voltage and transmits the signal to TCM.
TCM uses this signal in calculations for control switching or other functions.
• The line pressure sensor output voltage varies depending on the pressure variations. The voltage increases
as the pressure increases. C
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
E
dealer)".

A DTC is set if the line pressure sensor volt- • Line pressure sensor F
Line pressure sensor voltage
P0872 age value received by TCM is less than 90 • Harness or connector
system Low
mV. (Open in the line pressure sensor circuit)
eu
A DTC is set if the line pressure sensor volt- • Line pressure sensor G
Line pressure sensor voltage
P0873 age value received by TCM is more than • Harness or connector
system High
4,700 mV. (Short in the line pressure sensor circuit)

r e. H
to
If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is performed just before the next test, turn the ignition I
r-s
>> GO TO 2. J
t

.g
With CONSULT-III
w
K
w
Is the oil temperature −10°C (14°F) or more?

L
w
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE M
With CONSULT-III
2. With the shift lever in the P position, and run at idle for 5 seconds or more. N
3. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of TRANSMISSION.
YES >> Go to TM-169, "Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". O
P
"*****".
YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-169

Connector Terminal
B46 73 4
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Start engine.

Connector Terminal
eu
Engine • Shift lever: P, N position
B46 77 4 0.84 – 1.97 V
running • At idle
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
r e.
to
r-s
>> INSPECTION END

t
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (LINE PRESSURE SENSOR) (PART 1)
.g

w

w

w
Continuity
73 35
80 19
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (LINE PRESSURE SENSOR) (PART 2)

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
73
80
TM-170
YES >> GO TO 7. A
B
YES >> Replace transmission assembly. Refer to TM-291, "Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN C
dealer)".
TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-171
P0882 TCM POWER SUPPLY
The power supply distributes the power to the neutral signal transmitted to each solenoid, starter relay and
ECM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
SAN dealer)".
SAN dealer)".

• Battery voltage drop
Power supply voltage sys- A DTC is set if the power voltage input to • TCM relay
P0882
tem TCM is less than 10.5 V. • Harness or connector
(Open in the power supply circuit)
eu
r e.
to
>> GO TO 2.
r-s

With CONSULT-III
t

.g

Without CONSULT-III
w

w

w


2. Check ground connections B31. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in XX-XX, "*****".
YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-172

Connector Terminal
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON
1 4 (11 – 14 V) B
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON C
B45 5 4 (11 – 14 V)
TM
14 4 Battery voltage
Ignition switch OFF
(11 – 14 V)
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TCM RELAY (PART 1) F
1. Disconnect TCM harness connectors and TCM relay harness connector.
2. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and TCM relay vehicle side har-
eu
ness connector terminals. G
TCM vehicle side harness connector TCM relay vehicle side harness connector
e.
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
1
r 6
to
B45 5 B54 Existed
I
14 1
r-s

YES >> GO TO 4. J
t

.g
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TCM RELAY (PART 2)

w
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. K
w

Ground Continuity L
w
Connector Terminal
1
M
14
YES >> GO TO 5. N
5.CHECK TCM RELAY
O
Check TCM relay. Refer to TM-174, "Component Inspection (TCM Relay) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
YES >> GO TO 6. P
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
• 20A fuse (No. 36, located in the fuse and fusible link block)
• Fuse and fusible link block
• Harness for open or short TCM relay and battery
TM-173
YES >> GO TO 7.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (TCM Relay) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019961
1.CHECK TCM RELAY

Check continuity between TCM relay connector terminals.
CAUTION:
• When applying voltage, use a fuse.
• Never cause a short circuit.
TCM relay connector

Connector Terminal
Apply battery voltage between terminals 1 and 2 Existed
eu
3 5
B54
Apply battery voltage between terminals 1 and 2 Existed
6 7

r e.
to
NO >> Replace TCM relay.
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-174
P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SIGNAL
P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SIGNAL
A
• The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper section of the accelerator pedal assembly B
and detects the depressing amount of the accelerator pedal. The accelerator pedal position sensor converts
the depressing amount of the accelerator pedal into voltage signal and transmits it to ECM. ECM transmits
the signal to TCM via the CAN communication.
• TCM selects the driving gear using the gear shift line and corrects the operation of the clutches and clutch C
actuators based on the signal.
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
E
dealer)".

• Accelerator pedal position sensor
A DTC is set if TCM detects a difference be- • ECM
Throttle position CAN signal
eu
P1705 tween 2 signals of the throttle position (CAN • Harness or connector G
compatibility
signal). (Open or short in the accelerator pedal po-
sition sensor signal circuit)

r e. H
to
I
r-s
>> GO TO 2. J
t

.g
With CONSULT-III
w
1. Start the engine and run at idle for 5 seconds or more. K

w
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine and run at idle for 5 seconds or more. L
w
N
1.CHECK DTC WITH ECM
With CONSULT-III O
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”.
Is DTC detected?
P
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END
TM-175
P2713 AXIS B FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
• The axis B feed pressure solenoid valve is installed on the actuator control module and builds up the source
pressure for the gear operation actuators for odd number gears and reverse gear and for the clutch B pres-
sure solenoid valve based on the signals from TCM. The solenoid valves adjust the source pressure to drive
the gears and clutches.
• The axis B feed pressure solenoid valve is a N/L type (normal low) in which no control oil pressure is built up
when no current flows through the coil.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0700 is displayed, perform the diagnosis of DTC P0700 first. Refer to TM-58, "DTC Logic (GT-R cer-

A DTC is set if the axis B feed pressure so-
lenoid valve monitor current value is less
Axis B feed pressure sole- • Harness or connector
eu
P2713 than 0.2 A when the axis B feed pressure so-
noid valve current (Open or short in the axis B feed pressure
lenoid valve target current value is more
than 0.38 A.

r e.
to
r-s
>> GO TO 2.
t

.g
With CONSULT-III
w

w
CAUTION:
w

4. With the shift lever in the N position, and run at idle for 5 seconds or more.
Without CONSULT-III
CAUTION:

TM-176
"*****". A
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AXIS B FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT (PART 1)
C

Condition TM

B46 59 64 Transmission oil temperature: 50°C (122°F) 4.3 – 5.0 Ω E
YES >> GO TO 3. F
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK AXIS B FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT (PART 2)
eu
G
e.
Ground Continuity H
to
59
64 I
r-s

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4. J
t
.g
4.CHECK AXIS B FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

w
1. Disconnect transmission unit harness connectors. K

2. Check axis B feed pressure solenoid valve. Refer to TM-178, "Component Inspection (Axis B Feed Pres-
w
sure Solenoid Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".

w
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (AXIS B FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID M
VALVE) (PART 1)
harness connector terminals. N
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
59 21
B46 B49 Existed
64 22
P
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (AXIS B FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE) (PART 2)
TM-177

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
59
64
YES >> GO TO 7.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Axis B Feed Pressure Solenoid Valve) (GT-R certified NIS-
SAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019968
1.CHECK AXIS B FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (PART 1)

eu
Condition
prox.)
e.
Connector Terminal
r 3.8 – 4.4 Ω
to
r-s

YES >> GO TO 2.
t
2.CHECK AXIS B FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (PART 2)

.g
w
w

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
w
21
22
TM-178
P2714 AXIS B FEED PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
A
This solenoid valve builds up the source pressure for the gear operation actuators for odd number gears and B
reverse gear and for the clutch B solenoid valve based on the signals from TCM. The solenoid valves adjust
the source pressure to drive the gears and clutches.
DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004019970 C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE: TM
If DTC P0845 is detected, first diagnose DTC P0845. Refer to TM-166, "DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN
dealer)".
E
• A DTC is set if the clutch B pressure sen- • Axis B feed pressure solenoid valve
sor value is less than 0.4 MPa (4.08 kg/ • Clutch B solenoid valve
• Clutch B pressure sensor F
cm2, 58 psi) when the axis B feed pressure
• Clutch B oil passage
target value is 0.4 MPa (4.08 kg/cm2, 58
Axis B feed pressure sole- psi) or more.
P2714 (Open or short in the axis B feed pressure
eu
noid valve function • A DTC is set if the clutch B pressure sen-
G
sor value is more than 0.2 MPa (2.04 kg/
(Open or short in the clutch B solenoid
cm2, 29 psi) when the axis B feed pressure valve circuit)
psi) or less. r e.
target value is 0.1 MPa (1.02 kg/cm2, 14.5 (Open or short in the clutch B pressure
sensor circuit)
H
to
1.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION I
r-s
J
t
.g
>> GO TO 2.
w
K
With CONSULT-III
w

L
w

4. With the shift lever in the P position, and run at idle for 1 minute or more.
5. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”. M
Without CONSULT-III
N
4. With the shift lever in the P position, and run at idle for 1 minute or more.
Is DTC P2714 detected? O
P

YES >> GO TO 2.
TM-179
2.CHECK CLUTCH B SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CLUTCH B PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
YES >> GO TO 4.
"*****".
YES >> GO TO 5.
eu
e.
to
dealer)".
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-180
P2722 LUBRICATING FLOW SOLENOID VALVE
A
• The lubricating flow solenoid valve is installed on the front control module and controls the lubricating flow of B
the clutches A and B with the signals from TCM. This subsequently controls the lubricating flow of the gear
train.
• The lubricating flow solenoid valve is a N/H type (normal high) in which control oil pressure is built up when
no current flows through the coil. C
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
E
dealer)".

A DTC is set if the lubricating flow solenoid • Lubricating flow solenoid valve F
Lubricating flow solenoid valve monitor current value is less than 0.2 A • Harness or connector
P2722
valve system current when the lubricating flow solenoid valve tar- (Open or short in the lubricating flow sole-
eu
get current value is more than 0.38 A. noid valve circuit) G
e.
r
H
to
I
r-s
>> GO TO 2.
J
t
With CONSULT-III
.g

2. Shift the shift lever to the P position and run at idle for 5 seconds or more.
w
3. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”. K

Without CONSULT-III
w

2. Shift the shift lever to the P position and run at idle for 5 seconds or more. L
w
N
O
"*****".
P
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK LUBRICATING FLOW SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT (PART 1)
TM-181

Condition

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK LUBRICATING FLOW SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT (PART 2)

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
115
120
eu
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK LUBRICATING FLOW SOLENOID VALVE
1.
2.
Disconnect transmission unit harness connectors. r e.
Check lubricating flow solenoid valve. Refer to TM-183, "Component Inspection (Lubricating Flow Sole-
to
noid Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
r-s
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (LUBRICATING FLOW SOLENOID VALVE)
t
.g
(PART 1)
w

w
w
Continuity
115 55
B47 B50 Existed
120 54
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (LUBRICATING FLOW SOLENOID VALVE)
(PART 2)

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
115
120
YES >> GO TO 7.
TM-182
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

>> INSPECTION END B

Component Inspection (Lubricating Flow Solenoid Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN
dealer) INFOID:0000000004019977
C
1.CHECK LUBRICATING FLOW SOLENOID VALVE (PART 1)
Check the resistance between transmission unit harness connector terminals. TM

Condition
Connector Terminal prox.) E
F

YES >> GO TO 2.
eu
G
2.CHECK LUBRICATING FLOW SOLENOID VALVE (PART 2)
e.
r H
to
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal I
r-s
54
55
J
t

.g

w
K
w
L
w
TM-183
P2731 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
• The line pressure solenoid valve is installed on the front control module and controls the line pressure based
on the signal from TCM. This subsequently controls the lubricating flow.
• The line pressure solenoid valve is a N/H type (normal high) in which control oil pressure is built up when no
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0700 is displayed, perform the diagnosis of DTC P0700 first. Refer to TM-58, "DTC Logic (GT-R cer-
DTC Self-diagnosis name DTC detection condition Possible causes

A DTC is set if the line pressure solenoid • Line pressure solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve valve monitor current value is less than 0.2 A • Harness or connector
P2731
system current when the line pressure solenoid valve target (Open or short in the line pressure sole-
current value is more than 0.38 A. noid valve circuit)
eu
CAUTION:
1.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 1) r e.
to
r-s
>> GO TO 2.
t
.g
With CONSULT-III
w

Without CONSULT-III
w

w
Is the oil temperature 30°C (86°F) or more?

YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
TM-184
NO >> INSPECTION END A
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION B

"*****". C
YES >> GO TO 2.
TM
2.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT (PART 1)
1. Disconnect TCM harness connectors. E

Condition F
eu
B47 113 118 Transmission oil temperature: 50°C (122°F) 4.3 – 5.0 Ω G
e.
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 3. r
NO >> GO TO 4.
to
3.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT (PART 2) I
r-s
TCM vehicle side harness connector J

t
Ground Continuity
.g
Connector Terminal
113
w
B47 Ground Not existed K

118
w

YES >> GO TO 7. L
w
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
M
2. Check line pressure solenoid valve. Refer to TM-186, "Component Inspection (Line Pressure Solenoid
Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) (PART O
1)
Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and transmission unit vehicle side P
Continuity
113 49
B47 B50 Existed
118 48
TM-185
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE) (PART
2)

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
113
118
YES >> GO TO 7.
eu
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)
e.
INFOID:0000000004019981
1.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (PART 1) r

to
r-s

Condition
t

.g

4.7 – 5.4 Ω
w

w
YES >> GO TO 2.
w
2.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (PART 2)


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
48
49
TM-186
P2765 CLUTCH B SPEED SENSOR
A
• The clutch B speed sensor detects the 1st counter gear speed. The clutch B speed sensor converts the 1st B
counter gear speed into pulse signal and transmits the signal to TCM.
• TCM calculates the clutch B (a clutch for odd number gears and reverse) speed based on the signal from the
clutch B speed sensor.
C

A DTC is set if the status 1 or 2 below is de- E
tected with the sleeve B1 or B2 engaged in
an odd number gear.
1. The difference between the actual out-
put shaft speed and the output shaft • Clutch B speed sensor F
Clutch B speed pulse signal speed converted from the clutch B • Harness or connector
P2765
compatibility speed is 1,000 rpm or more. (Open or short in the clutch B speed sen-
2. The difference between the vehicle sor circuit)
eu
speed signal (meter) (CAN signal) and G
the output shaft speed converted from
the clutch B speed is 1,000 rpm or
e.
more.
H
r
to
CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed. I
r-s
J
t
.g
>> GO TO 2.
w
K
w
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. L
w
2. Select “RANGE”, “GEAR” and “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data Monitor”.

M
RANGE :M
GEAR :3
N
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. O

P
Gear :3
TM-187

"*****".
YES >> GO TO 2.

Connector Terminal Terminal
B46 78 4
YES >> GO TO 3.
eu
1.
2.
Start engine.
Check voltage between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals.r e.
to
r-s
Connector Terminal
t
.g
• M range, 1st gear

B46 82 4
w
w
NNDIA0062ZZ
w

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (CLUTCH B SPEED SENSOR) (PART 1)
Continuity
78 36
86 26
TM-188
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION (CLUTCH B SPEED SENSOR) (PART 2)
B
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
C
78
86 TM
YES >> GO TO 7.

Refer to XX-XX, "*****". F
eu
dealer)". G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-189
P2776 PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-UP SWITCH)
The paddle shifter (shift-up switch) is installed on the steering column and commands TCM the transition to M
range and upshift according to a driver's request.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
SAN dealer)".
SAN dealer)".

• Paddle shifter (shift-up switch)
A DTC is set if TCM detects the paddle
Continuation of shift-up • Harness or connector
P2776 shifter (shift-up switch) ON signal for a cer-
switch ON [Short in the paddle shifter (shift-up
tain period of time.
switch) circuit]
eu
r e.
to
>> GO TO 2.
r-s

With CONSULT-III
t

.g

w

w

w
INFOID:0000000004019987

2. Check ground connections B31, M11 and M55. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in XX-XX, "*****".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-UP SWITCH)
1. Disconnect paddle shifter (shift-up switch) harness connector.
2. Check paddle shifter (shift-up switch). Refer to TM-191, "Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up
Switch)] (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-UP SWITCH)
TM-190

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-UP SWITCH) AND GROUND
Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-up switch) vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
TM
Paddle shifter (shift-up switch) vehicle side harness connector
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M39 1 Ground Existed E
YES >> GO TO 5.
F
eu
Refer to XX-XX, "*****". G
>> INSPECTION END
e.
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up Switch)] (GT-R certified NISSAN deal-
er)
r H
to
INFOID:0000000004019988
I
1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-UP SWITCH)
r-s
Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-up switch) connector terminals.

J
t
.g
Paddle shifter (shift-up switch) connector

Connector Terminal
w
The paddle shifter (shift-up switch) is pulled Existed K

M39 1 3
w

w

M
TM-191
P2780 PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-DOWN SWITCH)
The paddle shifter (shift-down switch) is installed on the steering column and commands TCM the transition to
M range and downshift according to a driver's request.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
SAN dealer)".
SAN dealer)".

• Paddle shifter (shift-down switch)
A DTC is set if TCM detects the paddle
Continuation of shift-down • Harness or connector
P2780 shifter (shift-down switch) ON signal for a
switch ON [Short in the paddle shifter (shift-down
certain period.
switch) circuit]
eu
r e.
to
>> GO TO 2.
r-s

With CONSULT-III
t

.g

w

w

w
INFOID:0000000004019991

2. Check ground connections B31, M11 and M55. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in XX-XX, "*****".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-DOWN SWITCH)
1. Disconnect paddle shifter (shift-down switch) harness connector.
2. Check paddle shifter (shift-down switch). Refer to TM-193, "Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-
down Switch)] (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-DOWN SWITCH)
TM-192

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-DOWN SWITCH) AND GROUND
Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-down switch) vehicle side harness connector terminal and
ground. TM
Paddle shifter (shift-down switch) vehicle side harness connector

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal E
M32 1 Ground Existed
F
YES >> GO TO 5.
eu
G
>> INSPECTION END

r e.
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down Switch)] (GT-R certified NISSAN
H
to
dealer) INFOID:0000000004019992
I
r-s
1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-DOWN SWITCH)

Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-down switch) connector terminals. J
t
.g
Paddle shifter (shift-down switch) connector

w
Connector Terminal K
The paddle shifter (shift-down switch) is pulled Existed
w
M32 1 3
L
w

M
TM-193
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
Supply power to TCM.


2. Check ground connection B31. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in XX-XX, "*****".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND GROUND

Ground Continuity
eu
Connector Terminal
3
4
B45
7
8
r e. Ground Existed
to
r-s
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT (PART 1)
t
.g

w

Connector Terminal
w
Battery voltage
B45 9 4 Always
w
(11 – 14 V)
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND FUSE BLOCK (J/B) (PART 1)
1. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) harness connector.
2. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and fuse block (J/B) vehicle side
TCM vehicle side harness connector Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
B45 9 M1 4A Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND FUSE BLOCK (J/B) (PART 2)
TM-194
MAIN POWER SUPPLY

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B
YES >> GO TO 6.
C
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1)
• 10A fuse [No. 9, located in the fuse block (J/B)] TM
• Fuse block (J/B)
• Harness for open or short between battery and fuse block
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT (PART 2) F
eu
TCM vehicle side harness connector G
Connector Terminal
e.
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON H
B45 17 4 r (11 – 14 V)
to
YES >> GO TO 11.
r-s
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE J
t
.g
ENGINE ROOM) (PART 1)

1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
w
2. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R (intelligent power K
distribution module engine room) vehicle side harness connector terminal.
w
IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module en- L

w

gine room) vehicle side harness connector Continuity
B45 17 E7 58 Existed M
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. N
9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE
ENGINE ROOM) (PART 2)
O

Ground Continuity P
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2)
TM-195
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
• 10A fuse [No. 43, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room)]
• IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between push-button ignition switch and IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution
module engine room)
• Push-button ignition switch
YES >> GO TO 11.
>> INSPECTION END
eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-196
SET-UP SWITCH (TRANSMISSION)
A
If R or SNOW on the set-up switch (transmission) is selected, TCM energizes the circuit for each mode and B
illuminates the lamp.
C
2. Check ground connection B31. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in XX-XX, "*****". TM
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect set-up switch harness connector. F
3. Check voltage between set-up switch vehicle side harness connector and ground.
eu
Set-up switch vehicle side harness
G
connector Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.)
e.
Connector Terminal
H
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON
M73 18 Ground
r (11 – 14 V)
to
I
r-s
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5. J
t
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND SET-UP SWITCH (PART 1)

.g

w
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector. K

3. Check continuity between TCM vehicle side harness connector terminals and set-up switch vehicle side
w

L
w
TCM vehicle side harness connector Set-up switch vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
45 16 M
B45 M73 Existed
47 10
N
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND SET-UP SWITCH (PART 2) O
TCM vehicle side harness connector P

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
45
47
YES >> GO TO 8.
TM-197
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SET-UP SWITCH AND IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION
MODULE ENGINE ROOM) (PART 1)
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
3. Check continuity between set-up switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R (intelli-
gent power distribution module engine room) vehicle side harness connector terminal.
IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module en-

Set-up switch vehicle side harness connector
gine room) vehicle side harness connector Continuity
M73 18 E5 25 Existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SET-UP SWITCH AND IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION
MODULE ENGINE ROOM) (PART 2)
Check continuity between set-up switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
eu
Set-up switch vehicle side harness connector
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
e.
M73 18 Ground Not existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
to
r-s

• 10A fuse [No.45, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room)]
t
• IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room)

.g
• Harness for open or short between push-button ignition switch and IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution
module engine room)
w

w
YES >> GO TO 8.
w

>> INSPECTION END
TM-198
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
A
• TCM transmits the position indicator signals to the combination meter via CAN communication. B
• The A range indicator and M range indicator are included in the shift position indicator.
C
1.CHECK DTC WITH TRANSMISSION
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON. TM
YES >> GO TO 2. E
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-233, "DTC Index".
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F
Check the following harness connector pin terminals for any malfunctions on the connections, harness sheath
or other areas. Refer to XX-XX, "*****"
• Control device harness connector
eu
• Paddle shifter (shift-up switch) harness connector G
• Paddle shifter (shift-down switch) harness connector
• TCM harness connector
• Transmission harness connector
• Park position switch harness connector
• Combination meter harness connector
r e. H
to
r-s
YES >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".

J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-199
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
The shift lock system mainly consists of the following components.
Component Function
Shift lock solenoid Activated by the ignition switch and stop lamp switch signals.
When the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lamp switch turns ON and the transistor
Stop lamp switch
is energized via TCM.
Component Function Check (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020000
1.CHECK INFORMATION DISPLAY INDICATIONS

2. Check the information display indications in the combination meter.
Does the “T/M SYSTEM CHECK IN PROCESS” indication disappear?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 1)
eu
2. Shift the shift lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.
Can the shift lever be shifted to other positions? r e.
to
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 2)
r-s
Shift the shift lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.
Can the shift lever be shifted to other positions?
t

.g

w

w

w
Check the shift positions. Refer to “Inspection” in TM-268, "Inspection and Adjustment".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Adjust the shift positions. Refer to “Adjustment” in TM-268, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Check ground connections B31 and B14. Refer to “Ground Inspection” in XX-XX, "*****".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (PART 1)
1. Disconnect the control device harness connector.
3. Check voltage between the control device vehicle side harness connector and ground.
TM-200
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Control device vehicle side harness A

Connector Terminal
Battery voltage B
Ignition switch ON
B20 13 Ground (11 – 14 V)
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 7.
TM
Check the voltage between the control device vehicle side harness connector and ground.
E
Control device vehicle side harness
Connector Terminal
F
• Shift lever: P position Battery voltage
B20 14 Ground • Brake pedal depressed (11 – 14 V)
eu
G
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 10.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CONTROL DEVICE (SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID) AND GROUND
r e. H
to
Check continuity between the control device vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
I
r-s

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
J
t

.g

w
YES >> GO TO 6. K
w

L
w

YES >> Replace the control device. Refer to TM-272, "Exploded View". M
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CONTROL DEVICE (SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID) AND FUSE BLOCK (J/B)
(PART 1) N
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the fuse block (J/B) harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between the control device vehicle side harness connector terminal and the fuse O
block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal.
Control device vehicle side harness connector Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector
Continuity P
E20 13 M3 12C Existed
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CONTROL DEVICE (SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID) AND FUSE BLOCK (J/B)
TM-201
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
(PART 2)
Check continuity between the control device vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 9.
• 10A fuse [No.4, fuse block (J/B)]
• Harness for open or short between fuse block (J/B) and push-button ignition switch
YES >> GO TO 19.
10.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AMD CONTROL DEVICE (SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID) (PART 1)
eu
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the TCM harness connector.
3.
e.
Check the continuity between the TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and the control device
vehicle side harness connector terminal.
r
to
Continuity
r-s

t
.g
YES >> GO TO 11.

w
11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AMD CONTROL DEVICE (SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID) (PART 2)
w
Check the continuity between the TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
w

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (PART 2)
1. Disconnect the stop lamp switch harness connector.
2. Check voltage between the stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector and ground.
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness

Connector Terminal
Battery voltage
E110 1 Ground Always
(11 – 14 V)
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> GO TO 16.
TM-202
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
13.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH A

Check the stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-204, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) (GT-R certified
NISSAN dealer)".
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Replace the stop lamp switch. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
14.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AMD STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1) C
Check the continuity between the TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and the stop lamp switch vehi-
cle side harness connector terminal.
TM
TCM vehicle side harness connector Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
B45 16 E110 2 Existed
E

YES >> GO TO 15. F
15.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AMD STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2)
eu
Check the continuity between the TCM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. G
e.
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal H
B45 16
r Ground Not existed
to
I
YES >> GO TO 19.
r-s

16.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND FUSE BLOCK (J/B) (PART 1) J
t
.g
1. Disconnect the fuse block (J/B) harness connector.

2. Check the continuity between the stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and the fuse
w
block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal. K

w
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal L
w
E110 1 E103 8F Existed

M
YES >> GO TO 17.
17.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CONTROL DEVICE (SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID) AND FUSE BLOCK (J/ N
B) (PART 2)
Check continuity between the stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
O
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E110 1 Ground Not existed P
YES >> GO TO 18.
• 10A fuse [No.7, fuse block (J/B)]
TM-203
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
• Harness for open or short between fuse block (J/B) and battery
YES >> GO TO 19.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)
INFOID:0000000004020002
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

Check the continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.
Stop lamp switch connector

Connector Terminal
Brake pedal depressed Existed
eu
E110 1 2
Brake pedal not depressed Not existed
NO
e.
>> Replace the stop lamp switch. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
r
to
tr-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-204
TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
TCM
Reference Value (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020003
B
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

• In CONSULT-III, the electrical shift timing, which is the operation timing of each solenoid, is displayed. C
Therefore, if there is an obvious difference between the shift timing estimated from a shift shock (or engine
speed variations) and that shown on the CONSULT-III, the mechanical parts (including the hydraulic circuit)
excluding the solenoids and sensors may be malfunctioning. In this case, check the mechanical parts follow-
ing the appropriate diagnosis procedure. TM
• Shift point (gear position) displayed on CONSULT-III slightly differs from shift pattern described in Service
Manual. This is due to the following reasons.
- Actual shift pattern may vary slightly within specified tolerances. E
- While the shift pattern described in Service Manual indicates start of each shift, CONSULT-III shows gear
position at the end of shift.
- CONSULT-III display of each solenoid (ON–OFF) changes at the start of shifting. Display of gear position
changes at the end of shifting that is calculated by the control unit. F
CAUTION:
Each measurement must be performed at the transmission fluid temperature of 50°C (122°F) or more.
eu
G
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
Shift lever: P, N position −1.7 – 1.7 mm (−0.067 – 0.067 in)
SLEEVE B1 POSI 1
Shift lever: R position
Running with 1st gear
r e. −9.2 – −1.3 mm (−0.36 – 0.051 in)
1.3 – 9.0 mm (0.051 – 0.354 in)
H
to
Running with 2nd gear, 3rd gear, 4th gear, 5th gear, 6th gear
−1.7 – 1.7 mm (−0.067 – 0.067 in) I
r-s
Shift lever: P, N position −1.7 – 1.7 mm (−0.067 – 0.067 in)

Shift lever: R position −9.2 – −1.3 mm (−0.36 – 0.051 in)
J
t
SLEEVE B1 POSI 2 Running with 1st gear 1.3 – 9.0 mm (0.051 – 0.354 in)
.g
Running with 2nd gear, 3rd gear, 4th gear, 5th gear, 6th gear
−1.7 – 1.7 mm (−0.067 – 0.067 in)
w
K
Shift lever: P, R, N position −1.7 – 1.7 mm (−0.067 – 0.067 in)
w
Running with 1st gear, 2nd gear 9.0 – 1.3 mm (0.354 – 0.051 in)
L
w
SLEEVE A2 POSI Running with 3rd gear, 4th gear

−9.2 – −1.3 mm (−0.36 – −0.051 in)
Running with 5th gear, 6th gear
−1.7 – 1.7 mm (−0.067 – 0.067 in)
(Other than M range, R mode) M
Shift lever: P, R, or N position 1.9 – −1.9 mm (0.075 – −0.075 in)
Running with 1st gear 1.9 – −1.9 mm (0.075 – −0.075 in)
N
SLEEVE B2 POSI Running with 2nd gear, 3rd gear
1.3 – 9.0 mm (0.051 – 0.354 in)
Running with 4th gear, 5th gear, 6th gear
−1.3 – −9.4 mm (−0.051 – −0.37 in) O
Shift lever: P, R, or N position −1.6 – 1.7 mm (−0.063 – 0.067 in)
Running with 1st gear, 2nd gear, 3rd gear, 4th gear −1.6 – 1.7 mm (−0.063 – 0.067 in)
SLEEVE A1 POSI P
Running with 5th gear, 6th gear
1.3 – 9.0 mm (0.051 – 0.354 in)
ABS activated On
ABS OPERATION SIG
Other than the above Off
ACCEL POSI SEN 1 Closed throttle to wide-open throttle 0.0/8 – 8.0/8
TM-205
TCM
Shift lever: P, R, N position Off
When 2nd gear is released by selecting the shift lever from the A po-
sition to the N position
(Release 2nd gear after selecting the shift lever from the A position
to the N position).
Upshift
• When 2nd gear is released at 3rd gear normal driving
MON SHIFT SOL 1 (Release 2nd gear after shifting from 2nd gear to 3rd gear).
• When 4th gear is engaged at 3rd gear normal driving On
(Engage 4th gear after shifting from 2nd gear to 3rd gear).
Downshift
• When 6th gear is released during shifting from 5th gear to 4th gear
(Release 6th gear just before shifting from 5th gear to 4th gear).
• When 4th gear is engaged during shifting from 5th gear to 4th
gear
(Engage 4th gear just before shifting from 5th gear to 4th gear).
When 2nd gear is released by selecting the shift lever from the A po-
sition to the N position
(Release 2nd gear after selecting the shift lever from the A position
eu
to the N position).
Upshift
• When 2nd gear is released at 3rd gear normal driving
COMM SHIFT S/V 1
e.
(Release 2nd gear after shifting from 2nd gear to 3rd gear).
• When 4th gear is engaged at 3rd gear normal driving
r
(Engage 4th gear after shifting from 2nd gear to 3rd gear).
On
to
Downshift
r-s
• When 4th gear is engaged during shifting from 5th gear to 4th
gear
t
(Engage 4th gear just before shifting from 5th gear to 4th gear).
.g

w
When 2nd gear is engaged by selecting the shift lever from the N po-
sition to the A position
w
(Engage 2nd gear after selecting the shift lever from N position to A
position).
w
Upshift
• When 4th gear is released at 5th gear normal driving
(Release 4th gear after shifting from 4th gear to 5th gear).
MON SHIFT SOL 2 • When 6th gear is engaged at 5th gear normal driving
On
(Engage 6th gear after shifting from 4th gear to 5th gear).
Downshift
• When 4th gear is released during shifting from 3rd gear to 2nd
gear
(Release 4th gear just before shifting from 3rd gear to 2nd gear).
• When 2nd gear is engaged during shifting from 3rd gear to 2nd
gear
(Engage 2nd gear just before shifting from 3rd gear to 2nd gear).
TM-206
TCM
A
When 2nd gear is engaged by selecting the shift lever from the N po-
sition to the A position
(Engage 2nd gear after selecting the shift lever from N position to A B
position).
Upshift
• When 4th gear is released at 5th gear normal driving C
(Release 4th gear after shifting from 4th gear to 5th gear).
COMM SHIFT S/V 2 • When 6th gear is engaged at 5th gear normal driving
On
TM
Downshift
• When 4th gear is released during shifting from 3rd gear to 2nd
gear
(Release 4th gear just before shifting from 3rd gear to 2nd gear). E
• When 2nd gear is engaged during shifting from 3rd gear to 2nd
gear
(Engage 2nd gear just before shifting from 3rd gear to 2nd gear).
Shift lever: P, N position Off
F
• When reverse gear is engaged by selecting the shift lever from

the P or N position to the R position
eu
(Engage reverse gear after selecting the shift lever from the P or G
N position to the R position).
• When 1st gear is released by selecting the shift lever from the A
e.
position to the N position
(Release 1st gear after selecting the shift lever from the A position
H
to the N position).
r
to
MON SHIFT SOL 3 Upshift
• When 1st gear is released at 2nd gear normal driving On I
r-s
(Release 1st gear after shifting from 1st gear to 2nd gear).
• When 3rd gear is released at 4th gear normal driving
(Release 3rd gear after shifting from 3rd gear to 4th gear).
• When 5th gear is engaged at 4th gear normal driving J
t
.g
(Engage 5th gear after shifting from 3rd gear to 4th gear).
Downshift
w
• When 3rd gear is released during shifting from 2nd gear to 1st K
gear
w
(Release 3rd gear just before shifting from 2nd gear to 1st gear).
Shift lever: P, N position Off L
w
• When reverse gear is engaged by selecting the shift lever from

the P or N position to the R position
(Engage reverse gear after selecting the shift lever from the P or
N position to the R position). M
• When 1st gear is released by selecting the shift lever from the A
position to the N position
(Release 1st gear after selecting the shift lever from the A position
N
to the N position).
COMM SHIFT S/V 3 Upshift

• When 1st gear is released at 2nd gear normal driving On
(Release 1st gear after shifting from 1st gear to 2nd gear). O
• When 5th gear is engaged at 4th gear normal driving
P
Downshift
• When 3rd gear is released during shifting from 2nd gear to 1st
gear
(Release 3rd gear just before shifting from 2nd gear to 1st gear).
TM-207
TCM
• When reverse gear is released by selecting the shift lever from the
R position to the P or N position
(Release reverse gear after selecting the shift lever from the R po-
sition to the P or N position.)
• When 1st gear is engaged by selecting the selector gear from the
N position to the A position
(Engage 1st gear after selecting the shift lever from the N position
to the A position).
MON SHIFT SOL 4 Upshift
On
• When 3rd gear is engaged at 2nd gear normal driving
(Engage 3rd gear after shifting from 1st gear to 2nd gear).
Downshift
• When 5th gear is released during shifting from 4th gear to 3rd
gear
(Release 5th gear just before shifting from 4th gear to 3rd gear).
• When 3rd gear is engaged during shifting from 4th gear to 3rd
gear
(Engage 3rd gear just before shifting from 4th gear to 3rd gear).
eu
• When reverse gear is released by selecting the shift lever from the
R position to the P or N position
(Release reverse gear after selecting the shift lever from the R po-
e.
sition to the P or N position).
• When 1st gear is engaged by selecting the selector gear from the
r
N position to the A position
to
(Engage 1st gear after selecting the shift lever from the N position
to the A position).
COMM SHIFT S/V 4
r-s
Upshift
On
t
Downshift
.g
gear
w
w
gear
w
Ignition switch ON The transmission oil temperature in

FLUID TEMP
(5 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch ON) the oil pan is displayed.
Transmission fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F) 1,793 – 1,867 mV
FLUID TEMP SEN Transmission fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F) 1,096 – 1,150 mV
Transmission fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F) 573 – 617 mV
Shift lever: P, N position
(5 seconds or more after the engine is started with the shift lever in
COMM AXIS A S/V 0.52 – 0.67 A
the P position and the message “T/M SYSTEM CHECK IN PRO-
CESS” is not displayed on the information display)
COMM AXIS B S/V 0.52 – 0.67 A
the P position and the message “T/M SYSTEM CHECK IN PRO-
Brake pedal depressed On
STOP LAMP SW
TM-208
TCM
A
CLUTCH A PRESS the P position and the message “T/M SYSTEM CHECK IN PRO- 0.00 MPa
CESS” is not displayed on the information display) B
Running with reverse gear, 1st gear, 3rd gear, 5th gear
• Running with 2nd gear
It is almost the same engine speed
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm or more C
CLUTCH A SPEED as the value indicated on the ta-
Compare the value indicated on CONSULT-III with the value indicat-
chometer.
ed on the tachometer.
Shift lever: P, N position TM
COM CLUTCH A S/V the P position and the message “T/M SYSTEM CHECK IN PRO- 0.00 A
Running with reverse gear, 1st gear, 3rd gear, 5th gear E
The estimate temperature of clutch
CLUTCH A TEMP Ignition switch ON
A is displayed.
F
CLUTCH B PRESS the P position and the message “T/M SYSTEM CHECK IN PRO- 0.00 MPa
eu
CESS” is not displayed on the information display) G
Running with 2nd gear, 4th gear, 6th gear
• Running with 1st gear
e.
• Engine speed: 2500 rpm or more H
CLUTCH B SPEED as the value indicated on the ta-
Compare the value indicated on CONSULT-III with the value indicat-
chometer.
ed on the tachometer.
r
to
I
r-s
COM CLUTCH B S/V the P position and the message “T/M SYSTEM CHECK IN PRO- 0.00 A
Running with 2nd gear, 4th gear, 6th gear J
t
.g
The estimate temperature of clutch

CLUTCH B TEMP Ignition switch ON
B is displayed.
w
Shift lever: P, N position N/P K

w
GR POSITION Shift lever: R position R

While driving 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 L
w

Run the engine and compare the value indicated on CONSULT-III
ENGINE SPEED as the value indicated on the ta-
with the value indicated on the tachometer.
chometer.
M
Shift lever: P, N position N/P
GR POSI INDICATION
While driving 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Ignition switch ON On N
IGN SW
Ignition switch OFF Off
• Shift lever: P, N position
• At idle O
• Engine coolant temperature: 60°C (140°F) or more
0.7 – 1.15 MPa
• Transmission oil temperature: 120°C (248°F) or less
LINE PRESSURE • Blower motor: OFF
• Rear window defogger switch: OFF P
• Transmission oil temperature: 120°C (248°F) or less 0.85 – 1.15 MPa
TM-209
TCM
• At idle
• Engine coolant temperature: 60°C (140°F) or more
0.61 – 0.83 A
• Transmission oil temperature: 120°C (248°F) or less
COM LINE PRES S/V • Blower motor: OFF
• Rear window defogger switch: OFF
• Transmission oil temperature: 120°C (248°F) or less 0.61 – 0.78 A
• At idle
1.20 A
COMM LUBE S/V • Clutch A temperature: 150°C (302°F) or less
• Clutch B temperature: 150°C (302°F) or less
When driving with the throttle opening 2.0/8 0A
The shift lever is pressed to the M position side Off
AM RANGE CHG SW 1
Other than the above On
The shift lever is pressed to the M position side On
AM RANGE CHG SW 2
eu
Select the A range A/N
SNOW of set-up switch (transmission) is selected at the A range.
A/S
(SNOW lamp ON)
MODE
ON)
Select the M range
r e.
R of set-up switch (transmission) is selected at the A range (R lamp
A/R
M/N
to
R of set-up switch (transmission) is selected at the M range. (R lamp
M/R
r-s
ON)
R of set-up switch (transmission) is selected (R lamp ON) On
COM R MODE LAMP
t
.g
SNOW of set-up switch (transmission) is selected (SNOW lamp ON) On

COM S MODE LMP
w
Shift lever: P, N position On

COM NEUTRAL SIG
w

It is almost the same speed as the
w
value of the clutch A speed or

OUTPUT SHAFT SPD While driving
clutch B speed divided by the gear
ratio of the driving gear.
Shift lever: P position On
PARK POSITION SW
Shift lever: P position P
Shift lever: R position R
RANGE Shift lever: N position N
Shift lever: A position A
Shift lever: M position M
Shift lever: R position On
COM BACK LMP RLY
MON BACK LMP RLY
TM-210
TCM
A
Upshift
(Engage 3rd gear after shifting from 1st gear to 2nd gear). B
C
MON SEQ S/V Downshift TM
• When 6th gear is released during shifting from 5th gear to 4th gear On
gear E
gear
F
• When 3rd gear is released during shifting from 2nd gear to 1st
gear
eu
(Release 3rd gear just before shifting from 2nd gear to 1st gear). G
Upshift
e.
r
H
to
• When 5th gear is engaged at 4th gear normal driving I
r-s
COMM SEQ S/V (Engage 6th gear after shifting from 4th gear to 5th gear).
On J
t
Downshift
.g
w
• When 5th gear is released during shifting from 4th gear to 3rd K
gear
w
L
w
gear
With the knob of the set-up switch (transmission) pressed to the R
On
R MODE SW side M
With the knob of the set-up switch (transmission) pressed to the
On N
SNOW MODE SW SNOW side
Shift lever: P position On
TR SENSOR No.0 O
TR SENSOR No.1
Other than the above Off P
Shift lever: R, N position On
TR SENSOR No.2
Shift lever: N position On
TR SENSOR No.3
TM-211
TCM
Shift lever; N, A, M position On
TR SENSOR No.4
Shift lever: A, M position On
TR SENSOR No.5
It is almost the same speed as the
Turn the drive wheel and compare the value indicated on CON-
VEHICLE SPEED value indicated on the speedome-
SULT-III with the value indicated on the speedometer.
ter.
COM STARTER RLY
MON STARTER RLY
The paddle shifter (shift-down switch) continues being pulled for-
On
PADDLE SFT (DOWN) ward
The paddle shifter (shift-up switch) continues being pulled forward On
PADDLE SFT (UP)
eu
ACCEL POSI SEN 2 Closed throttle to wide-open throttle 0.0/8 – 8.0/8
BATTERY VOLTAGE Ignition switch ON (engine stopped) Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)
e.
VDC activated On
VDC OPERATION SIG
Other than the above r Off
TCM RELAY Ignition switch ON On
to
“T/M SYSTEM CHECK IN PROCESS” is displayed on the informa-
tion display in the combination meter when the shift lever is in P po- On
r-s
SHIFT LOCK SOL sition.

Shift lever in any position other than P Off
t
TERMINAL LAYOUT
.g
w
w
w
JMBIA0070ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
NOTE:
• TCM is installed to the back of the rear seatback. Remove the trim of the trunk room to check the input/out-
put signal. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
TM-212
TCM
• Disconnect the TCM harness connector. Push the protrusion for
fixing and fully open the lever (A) as shown in the figure when dis- A
connecting the harness connector.
1 : TCM
B
Direction B : Disconnect
Direction C : Connect
NNDIA0021ZZ
TM
• The values in the table are the reference value measured between each terminal and ground.
Terminal No. E
Description
(Wire color)
Condition Value (Approx.)
Input/
＋ − Signal name
Output
F
1 Ignition switch ON Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)
4 BATT-2 Input
(W) Ignition switch OFF 0V
eu
3 G
Ground GND Output Always 0V
(B)
4
e.
(B) H
Ignition switch ON Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)
5
4 BATT-3 Input
r
to
(W) Ignition switch OFF 0V
7 I
r-s

(B)
8
Ground GND Output Always 0V J
(B)
t
.g
9
4 BATT-1 Input Always Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)
(P)
w
Ignition K
10 Back-up lamp Shift lever: R position 0V
4 Output switch ON
w
(LG) signal
Other than the above Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)
L
w
11 Input/
— CAN-H — —
(L) Output
14 Ignition switch ON 0V
4 Power OFF Output M
(V) Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)
15 Input/
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output
N
16 Stop lamp Ignition Brake pedal depressed Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)
4 Input
(W) switch signal switch ON Other than the above 0V
17 Ignition switch Ignition switch ON Battery voltage (11 – 14 V) O

4 Input
(Y) signal Ignition switch OFF 0V
19 Starter relay Ignition Shift lever: P, N position Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)

4 Output P
(GR) signal switch ON Other than the above 0V
Auto/manual The shift lever is pressed to the M posi-

23 Ignition 0V
4 range change Input tion side
(BR) switch ON
switch 1 signal Other than the above 5V
25 Range sensor Ignition switch ON 5V

4 Output
(L) power source 1 Ignition switch OFF 0V
TM-213
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color)
Input/
＋ − Signal name
Output
26 Range sensor Ignition switch ON 5V

4 Output
(LG) power source 2 Ignition switch OFF 0V
27 Range sensor Ignition Shift lever: P position 0V

4 Input
(G) No.0 signal switch ON Other than the above 5V
Auto/manual The shift lever is pressed to the M posi-

28 Ignition 5V
4 range change Input tion side
(V) switch ON
switch 2 signal Other than the above 0V
1 V*
At idle
NOTE:
The pulse period changes depending
on the idle speed
After en-
31 Engine speed gine JMBIA0076GB
eu
4 Input
(SB) signal warming
1 V*
up
e.
Engine speed: 2000 rpm
r
to
r-s
JMBIA0077GB
33 Range sensor Ignition Shift lever: R position 0V

4 Input
(V) No.1 signal switch ON Other than the above 5V
t
.g
With the knob of the set-up switch

34 SNOW mode Ignition (transmission) pressed to the SNOW 0V
4 Input side
(O) switch signal switch ON
w

w
35 Range sensor Ignition Shift lever: N position 0V

4 Input
(G) No.3 signal switch ON
w

With the knob of the set-up switch
37 R mode switch Ignition 0V
4 Input (transmission) pressed onto the R side
(GR) signal switch ON
38 Range sensor Ignition Shift lever: R, N position 0V

4 Input
(R) No.2 signal switch ON Other than the above 5V
Paddle shifter The paddle shifter (shift-up switch) con-

39 Ignition 0V
4 (shift-up Input tinues being pulled forward
(W) switch ON
switch) signal Other than the above Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)
Paddle shifter The paddle shifter (shift-down switch)

42 Ignition 0V
4 (shift-down Input continues being pulled forward
(L) switch ON
switch) signal Other than the above Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)
43 Range sensor Ignition Shift lever; N, A, M position 0V

4 Input
(P) No.4 signal switch ON Other than the above 5V
44 Range sensor Ignition Shift lever: A, M position 0V

4 Input
(GR) No.5 signal switch ON Other than the above 5V
TM-214
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) A
Input/
＋ − Signal name
Output
R of set-up switch (transmission) is se- B
45 R mode lamp Ignition 0V
4 Input lected (R lamp ON)
(O) signal switch ON
• Shift lever: P position C
Shift lock sole- Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)
46 Ignition • Brake pedal depressed
4 noid control Output
(W) switch ON
signal Other than the above 0V
TM
SNOW of set-up switch (transmission)
47 SNOW mode Ignition 0V
4 Input is selected (SNOW lamp ON)
(G) lamp signal switch ON
E
Engine
Shift lever: P, R, or N position 0V
running
When 2nd gear is released by selecting
the shift lever from the A position to the F
N position
(Release 2nd gear after selecting the
eu
shift lever from the A position to the N
G
position).
Upshift
e.
• When 2nd gear is released at 3rd
gear normal driving H
While (Release 2nd gear after shifting from
49 Shift solenoid
r
to
4 Output driving 2nd gear to 3rd gear).
(L) valve 1 (+) (Other • When 4th gear is engaged at 3rd gear
I
than M normal driving
r-s
range, R (Engage 4th gear after shifting from

mode) 2nd gear to 3rd gear).
Downshift NNDIA0131ZZ J
t
.g
• When 6th gear is released during

shifting from 5th gear to 4th gear
(Release 6th gear just before shifting
w
from 5th gear to 4th gear).

K
• When 4th gear is engaged during
w
shifting from 5th gear to 4th gear

(Engage 4th gear just before shifting L
w
TM-215
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color)
Input/
＋ − Signal name
Output
Engine
Shift lever: P, N position 0V
running
• When reverse gear is engaged by se-
lecting the shift lever from the P or N
position to the R position
(Engage reverse gear after selecting
the shift lever from the P or N position
to the R position).
• When 1st gear is released by select-
ing the shift lever from the A position
to the N position
(Release 1st gear after selecting the
shift lever from the A position to the N
position).
While Upshift
51 Shift solenoid driving • When 1st gear is released at 2nd
4 Output
(P) valve 3 (+) (Other gear normal driving
than M (Release 1st gear after shifting from
eu
range, R 1st gear to 2nd gear).
mode) • When 3rd gear is released at 4th gear
normal driving
e.
NNDIA0131ZZ
(Release 3rd gear after shifting from
3rd gear to 4th gear).
r
• When 5th gear is engaged at 4th gear
to
normal driving
(Engage 5th gear after shifting from
r-s
Downshift
• When 3rd gear is released during
shifting from 2nd gear to 1st gear
t
.g
(Release 3rd gear just before shifting

from 2nd gear to 1st gear).
w
w
w
TM-216
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) A
Input/
＋ − Signal name
Output
Engine B
Shift lever: P, R, N position 0V
running
Upshift
• When 3rd gear is engaged at 2nd C
gear normal driving
(Engage 3rd gear after shifting from
1st gear to 2nd gear).
• When 3rd gear is released at 4th gear TM
normal driving
(Release 3rd gear after shifting from
• When 5th gear is engaged at 4th gear E
normal driving
(Engage 5th gear after shifting from
F
• When 6th gear is engaged at 5th gear
While normal driving
53 Sequence so- driving (Engage 6th gear after shifting from
4 Output
eu
(GR) lenoid valve (+) (Other 4th gear to 5th gear). G
than the Downshift
M range, • When 6th gear is released during
e.
R mode) shifting from 5th gear to 4th gear
H
r NNDIA0133ZZ
to
shifting from 4th gear to 3rd gear I
r-s
from 4th gear to 3rd gear).

• When 3rd gear is engaged during
shifting from 4th gear to 3rd gear J
t
(Engage 3rd gear just before shifting

.g

• When 3rd gear is released during
w
shifting from 2nd gear to 1st gear K

(Release 3rd gear just before shifting
w
from 2nd gear to 1st gear).
L
w
TM-217
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color)
Input/
＋ − Signal name
Output
Engine
Shift lever: P, R, N position 0V
running
When 2nd gear is engaged by selecting
the selector gear from the N position to
the A position
(Engage 2nd gear after selecting the
shift lever from the N position to the A
position).
Upshift
• When 4th gear is released at 5th gear
normal driving
While (Release 4th gear after shifting from
54 Shift solenoid driving 4th gear to 5th gear).
4 Output
(W) valve 2 (+) (Other • When 6th gear is engaged at 5th gear
than the normal driving
M range, (Engage 6th gear after shifting from
R mode) 4th gear to 5th gear).
eu
Downshift NNDIA0131ZZ

shifting from 3rd gear to 2nd gear
e.
from 3rd gear to 2nd gear).
• When 2nd gear is engaged during
r
shifting from 3rd gear to 2nd gear
to
(Engage 2nd gear just before shifting
from 3rd gear to 2nd gear).
r-s
Engine
Shift lever: P, N position 0V
running
• When reverse gear is released by se-
t
.g
lecting the shift lever from the R posi-

tion to the P or N position
(Release reverse gear after selecting
w
the shift lever from the R position to

the P or N position).
w
• When 1st gear is engaged by select-

ing the selector gear from the N posi-
w
tion to the A position

(Engage 1st gear after selecting the
shift lever from the N position to the A
While
56 Shift solenoid position).
4 Output driving
(LG) valve 4 (+) (Other Upshift
than M • When 3rd gear is engaged at 2nd
range, R gear normal driving
mode) (Engage 3rd gear after shifting from
1st gear to 2nd gear). NNDIA0131ZZ
Downshift
shifting from 4th gear to 3rd gear
• When 3rd gear is engaged during
shifting from 4th gear to 3rd gear
(Engage 3rd gear just before shifting
TM-218
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) A
Input/
＋ − Signal name
Output
B
5 seconds or more after the engine is

Axis A feed started with the shift lever in the P posi-
57 Engine C
4 pressure sole- Output tion and the message “T/M SYSTEM
(BR) running
noid valve (+) CHECK IN PROCESS” is not displayed
on the information display
NNDIA0054ZZ TM
5 seconds or more after the engine is E

Axis B feed started with the shift lever in P position
59 Engine
4 pressure sole- Output and the message “T/M SYSTEM
(G) running
noid valve (+) CHECK IN PROCESS” is not displayed
on the information display F
NNDIA0054ZZ
Axis A feed
eu
62 G
4 pressure sole- Input Always 0V
(R)
noid valve (−)
e.
Axis B feed
64 H
4 pressure sole- Input Always 0V
(O)
noid valve (−)
r
to
6th-Neutral po-
66
4 sition sensor (− Input Always 0V I
(R)
)
r-s
Engine Shift lever: P, N position 2.19 – 2.88 V

running Shift lever: R position 0.68 – 1.76 V J
t
1st-Reverse
67
.g
4 position sensor Input 1st gear 3.34 – 4.41 V

(L)
1 signal While 2nd gear, 3rd gear, 4th gear, 5th gear,
w
driving 6th gear 2.19 – 2.88 V K

w
68 Clutch A speed
4 Input Always 0V
(BR) sensor (−) L
w
1st-Reverse
69
4 position sensor Input Always 0V
(Y)
2 (−)
M
Engine
running 2.19 – 2.88 V
6th-Neutral po-
70
4 sition sensor Input 1st gear, 2nd gear, 3rd gear, 4th gear N
(W) While
signal
driving 5th gear, 6th gear
0.68 – 1.76 V
1st-Reverse Ignition switch ON 5V O
71
4 position sensor Output
(Y) Ignition switch OFF 0V
1 (+)
72 Clutch A speed • M range, 2nd gear

4 Input
(G) sensor signal • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
NNDIA0061ZZ
TM-219
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color)
Input/
＋ − Signal name
Output
73 Line pressure Ignition switch ON 5V

4 Output
(Y) sensor (+) Ignition switch OFF 0V
6th-Neutral po- Ignition switch ON 5V
74
4 sition sensor Output
(BR) Ignition switch OFF 0V
(+)
1st-Reverse Ignition switch ON 5V
75
4 position sensor Output
(L) Ignition switch OFF 0V
2 (+)
76 Clutch A speed Ignition switch ON 5V

4 Output
(Y) sensor (+) Ignition switch OFF 0V
77 Line pressure Engine • Shift lever: P, N position
4 Input 0.84 – 1.97 V
(GR) sensor signal running • At idle
78 Clutch B speed Ignition switch ON 5V

4 Output
(R) sensor (+) Ignition switch OFF 0V
Shift lever: P, N position 2.19 – 2.88 V
eu
Engine
1st-Reverse
79 1st gear 0.68 – 1.76 V
e.
4 position sensor Input
(G)
2 signal While 2nd gear, 3rd gear, 4th gear, 5th gear,
driving 6th gear
r 2.19 – 2.88 V
to
80 Line pressure
4 Input Always 2.19 – 2.88 V
r-s
(BR) sensor (−)
81 2nd-4th posi- Ignition switch ON 5V

4 Output
(G) tion sensor (+) Ignition switch OFF 0V
t
.g
w
82 Clutch B speed • M range, 1st gear

4 Input
w
(W) sensor signal • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

w
NNDIA0062ZZ
83 2nd-4th posi-
4 Input Always 0V
(L) tion sensor (−)
84 3rd-5th posi-
4 Input Always 0V
(BR) tion sensor (−)
Engine
Shift lever: P, R, N position 2.19 – 2.88 V
running
2nd-4th posi- 1st gear, 2nd gear 0.68 – 1.76 V

85
4 tion sensor sig- Input 3rd gear, 4th gear
(Y) While 3.34 – 4.41 V
nal (Other than M range, R mode)
driving
5th gear, 6th gear
2.19 – 2.88 V
86 Clutch B speed
4 Input Always 0V
(L) sensor (−)
TM-220
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) A
Input/
＋ − Signal name
Output
Transmission fluid temperature: 20°C B
1.80 – 1.86 V
(68°F)
87 Fluid tempera- Ignition Transmission fluid temperature: 50°C
4 Output 1.10 – 1.15 V
(L) ture sensor (+) switch ON (122°F) C
Transmission fluid temperature: 80°C
0.58 – 0.61 V
(176°F)
88 3rd-5th posi- Ignition switch ON 5V TM

4 Output
(W) tion sensor (+) Ignition switch OFF 0V
89 Park position Ignition Shift lever: P position 0V

4 Input E
(O) switch signal switch ON Other than the above 5V
91 Fluid tempera-
4 Input Always 0V
(SB) ture sensor (−)
F
Engine
running 2.19 – 2.88 V
1st gear
eu
3rd-5th posi- G
92
4 tion sensor sig- Input 2nd gear, 3rd gear
(R) While 0.68 – 1.76 V
nal (Other than M range, R mode)
driving
1st-Reverse
e.
4th gear, 5th gear, 6th gear
r 3.34 – 4.41 V H
to
94
4 position sensor Input Always 0V
(G)
1 (−)
I
r-s
97 Clutch A pres- Ignition switch ON 5V

4 Output
(BR) sure sensor (+) Ignition switch OFF 0V J
t
Engine
.g
Clutch A pres- Shift lever: P, R, N position

98 running
4 sure sensor Input 0.38 – 0.64 V
(R)
w
signal While K
1st gear, 3rd gear, 5th gear
driving
w
99 Clutch A pres-
4 Input Always 0V
(W) sure sensor (−)
L
w
102 Clutch B pres- Ignition switch ON 5V

4 Output
(Y) sure sensor (+) Ignition switch OFF 0V
Engine M
Clutch B pres- Shift lever: P, R, N position
103 running
4 sure sensor Input 0.38 – 0.64 V
(L) While
signal 2nd gear, 4th gear, 6th gear
driving N
104 Clutch B pres-
4 Input Always 0V
(G) sure sensor (−)
105
Output shaft Ignition switch ON 5V O
4 speed sensor Output
(L) Ignition switch OFF 0V
(+)
Output shaft
106 • M range, 1st gear
4 speed sensor Input
(G) • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
signal
NNDIA0055ZZ
TM-221
TCM
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color)
Input/
＋ − Signal name
Output
Output shaft
107
4 speed sensor Input Always 0V
(Y)
(−)
Line pressure
113
4 solenoid valve Input Always 0V
(O)
(−)
Lubricating
115
4 flow solenoid Input Always 0V
(W)
valve (−)
Line pressure
118 Engine • Shift lever: P, N position
4 solenoid valve Output
(V) running • At idle
(+)
NNDIA0056ZZ
eu
120
(BR)
4
Lubricating
flow solenoid
valve (+)
Output
Engine
running • At idle
r e.
to
r-s
NNDIA0057ZZ
121 Clutch A sole- Other than running with 2nd gear, 4th gear, 6th gear
4 Output 0V
(R) noid valve (+) (Clutch A is not engaged)
t
Other than running with reverse gear, 1st gear, 3rd

.g
123 Clutch B sole-

4 Output gear, 5th gear 0V
(G) noid valve (+)
(Clutch B is not engaged)
w
126 Clutch A sole-

4 Input Always 0V
(LG) noid valve (−)
w
128 Clutch B sole-

4 Input Always 0V
w
(Y) noid valve (−)

*: Average voltage value of pulse waveform (The correct waveform is measured with an oscilloscope)
Wiring Diagram - TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM - (GT-R certified NISSAN
TM-222
TCM
dealer) INFOID:0000000004020004
TM
eu
G
re. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
P
JCDWA0235GB
TM-223
TCM
eu
re.
to
r-s
t
.g
w
w
w
JCDWA0236GB
TM-224
TCM
TM
eu
G
re. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
JCDWA0237GB
TM-225
TCM
eu
re.
to
r-s
t
.g
w
w
w
JCDWA0238GB
TM-226
TCM
TM
eu
G
re. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
JCDWA0239GB
TM-227
TCM
eu
re.
to
r-s
t
.g
w
w
w
JCDWA0240GB
TM-228
TCM
TM
eu
G
re. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
JCDWA0241GB
TM-229
TCM
eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
JCDWA0242GB
Fail Safe (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020005
PRECAUTION REGARDING FAIL SAFE FUNCTIONS

TCM has the electrical fail safe mode. The mode functions so that the operation can be continued even if the
signal circuit of the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
TM-230
TCM
Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop rotation of wheels). In this case, turn A
the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern.
Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already returns to normal condition. Refer to TM-6, "Work Flow
(GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". Following are results of self-diagnosis.
B
FAIL SAFE FUNCTION
If a malfunction occurs in either of the sensors or solenoids, this function controls the normal operation without
downgrading the drivability. C
DTC No. The transmission operates under the fail safe mode
P0700*1 Release the clutches A and B if an error is detected. The driving force is not transmitted caused by this. The vehicle TM
P0705 cannot be driven.
Fixed into the driving gear to get the vehicle driven, if an error occurs.
• When the vehicle starts again after it is stopped, it becomes the following conditions. E
Driving gear when the error occurs Restart
Possible to drive forward only
1st gear
(fixed into 1st gear) F
Driving gear Only moving forward is possible
2nd gear
(fixed into 2nd gear)
eu
3rd gear, 4th gear, 5th gear, 6th gear, Neutral, Not G
Impossible
identified
Only moving rearward is possible
e.
Reverse
(fixed into Reverse gear) H
• The M range driving is prohibited. (During M range driving, the vehicle is forcibly shifted to the A range
P0770
driving)
r
to
P0882 Driving mode
• Selecting the set-up switch is prohibited. (If SNOW or R is selected, the vehicle is forcibly set to Nor-
mal) I
r-s
The engine torque is restricted by the driving gear when the error occurs, and then the vehicle speed
(maximum speed) is restricted.
J
t
Driving gear when the error occurs Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
.g
1st gear, 2nd gear 46 (29)

Vehicle 3rd gear, 4th gear 85 (53)
w
speed K
5th gear, 6th gear 134 (84)
w
Reverse 46 (29)
L
w
Neutral 134 (84)

Not identified 46 (46)
• Release the clutch A and prohibit the using of even gears (2nd gear, 4th gear, and 6th gear).
• During driving, shift up or down to the next gear (odd gear) according to the driving conditions, and
M
Driving gear then shift the gear and drive the vehicle using the odd gears (1st gear, 3rd gear, 5th gear, and Reverse
gear).
- Shift to 5th gear after decelerating the vehicle speed to prevent over rev during driving at 6th gear. N
P0700*2
P0715
driving).
P0729 Driving mode
P0732 O
mal).
P0745
P0746 The engine torque is restricted by the driving gear when the error occurs, and then the vehicle speed
P0750 (maximum speed) is restricted.
P0755
Driving gear when the error occurs Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
P
P0795
P0797 2nd gear 46 (29)
Vehicle
P0840 speed 4th gear 85 (53)
6th gear 134 (84)
Neutral 134 (84)
Not identified 46 (29)
TM-231
TCM
DTC No. The transmission operates under the fail safe mode
• Release the clutch B and prohibit the using of odd gears (1st gear, 3rd gear, 5th gear) and reverse
gear.
• During driving, shift up or down to the next gear (even gear) according to the driving conditions, and
Driving gear
then shift the gear and drive the vehicle using the even gears (2nd gear, 4th gear, 6th gear).
- Shift to the neutral conditions when the error is detected during driving at reverse gear.
- Shift to 2nd gear when the error is detected during driving at 1st gear.
P0700*2 • The M range driving is prohibited. (During M range driving, the vehicle is forcibly shifted to the A range
P0731 driving.)
P0733 Driving mode
P0760 mal.)
P0765
P0775 The engine torque is restricted by the driving gear when the error occurs, and then the vehicle speed
P0776 (maximum speed) is restricted.
P0845 Driving gear when the error occurs Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
P2713
P2714 1st gear 46 (29)
P2765 Vehicle 3rd gear 85 (53)
speed
5th gear 134 (84)
Reverse 46 (29)
Neutral 134 (84)
eu
Unknown 46 (29)
Driving gear The use of all gears becomes possible.
e.
driving.)
Driving mode
mal.)
r
to
P0700*3, *4 Restrict or fix the engine torque and fix the throttle position according to the detected DTC.
r-s
P0705
DTC Engine torque Throttle position
P1705
Vehicle P0700*3 Fixed Approximately 1/8 fixed
t
speed
P0700*4 Restricted As per usual
.g
P0705 Restricted As per usual

w
P1705 Fixed Approximately 1/8 fixed

• *1: The fail safe mode operates if an error is detected in the TCM internal diagnosis.
w
• *2: The fail safe mode operates if an error is detected in the sensor power supply voltage diagnosis.
w
• *3: The fail safe mode operates if an engine torque error signal is detected.
• *4: The fail safe mode operates if an engine speed error signal is detected.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020006
When multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check one by one as per the following priority list.
TM-232
TCM
Priority Detected items (DTC) A

1 • U1000 CAN COMM CIRC
2 • P0700 TCM
• P0705 PNP SW/CIRC B
• P0706 TR SENSOR A CIRCUIT
• P0715 INPUT SPD SEN/CIRC
• P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT
• P0750 SHIFT SOL A C
• P0755 SHIFT SOL B
• P0760 SHIFT SOL C
• P0765 SHIFT SOL D
• P0770 SHIFT SOL E
TM
• P0790 NRML/PERFORM SW CIRC
• P0827 UP and DOWN SFT SW CIRC
• P0828 UP and DOWN SFT SW CIRC E
• P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T
• P2713 PRESS CONTROL SOL D
• P2765 INP/TRBN SPD SEN B CIR
3 • P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC F
• P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG
• P0729 A/T 6ST GR FNCTN
• P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
eu
G
• P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
• P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
• P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
•
•
•
P0775 PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)
P0795 PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)
P0840 TR PRS SENS/A CIRC
r e. H
to
• P0845 TR PRS SENS/B CIRC
• P0872 TFP SENSOR/SW C CIRC I
r-s
• P0873 TFP SENSOR/SW C CIRC

• P0882 TCM POWER INPT SIG
• P2722 PRESS CONTROL SOL E
• P2731 PRESS CONTROL SOL F J
t
• P2776 UPSHIFT SW CIRCUIT

.g
• P2780 DOWNSHIFT SW CIRCUIT

w
4 • P0711 FLUID TEMP SEN K

• P0746 PRS CNT SOL/A FCTN
w
• P0776 PRS CNT SOL/B FCTN

• P0797 PC SOL C STC ON
L
w
• P2714 PRESS CONTROL SOL D
DTC Index INFOID:0000000004020007
M
DTC*
MIL, “ENGINE” with Item Transmission warn-
“TRANSMISSION” Reference N
CONSULT-III or (CONSULT-III screen terms) ing light
with CONSULT-III
GST
P0700 P0700 TCM Blinking TM-58
O
P0705 P0705 PNP SW/CIRC Blinking TM-62
P0706 — TR SENSOR A CIRCUIT — TM-68
P0710 P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC — TM-73 P
P0711 P0711 FLUID TEMP SEN — TM-76
P0715 P0715 INPUT SPD SEN/CIRC Blinking TM-79
P0720 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT — TM-82
P0725 — ENGINE SPEED SIG — TM-87
P0729 P0729 A/T 6ST GR FNCTN Blinking TM-91
TM-233
TCM
DTC*
MIL, “ENGINE” with Item Transmission warn-
“TRANSMISSION” Reference
CONSULT-III or (CONSULT-III screen terms) ing light
with CONSULT-III
GST
P0731 P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN Blinking TM-99
P0732 P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN Blinking TM-108
P0733 P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN Blinking TM-117
P0745 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC Blinking TM-126
P0746 P0746 PRS CNT SOL/A FCTN Blinking TM-129
P0750 P0750 SHIFT SOL A Blinking TM-132
P0755 P0755 SHIFT SOL B Blinking TM-135
P0760 P0760 SHIFT SOL C Blinking TM-138
P0765 P0765 SHIFT SOL D Blinking TM-141
P0770 P0770 SHIFT SOL E Blinking TM-144
P0775 P0775 PC SOL B(SFT/PRS) Blinking TM-147
P0776 P0776 PRS CNT SOL/B FCTN Blinking TM-150
P0790 — NRML/PERFORM SW CIRC — TM-153
eu
P0795 P0795 PC SOL C(TCC&SFT) Blinking TM-155
P0797 P0797 PC SOL C STC ON Blinking TM-158
P0827
P0828
—
—
UP and DOWN SFT SW CIRC
r
UP and DOWN SFT SW CIRC e. —
—
TM-160
TM-160
to
P0840 P0840 TR PRS SENS/A CIRC Blinking TM-163
P0845 P0845 TR PRS SENS/B CIRC Blinking TM-166
r-s
P0872 — TFP SENSOR/SW C CIRC — TM-169

P0873 — TFP SENSOR/SW C CIRC — TM-169
t
P0882 P0882 TCM POWER INPT SIG Blinking TM-172

.g
P1705 P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T Blinking TM-175

w
P2713 P2713 PRESS CONTROL SOL D Blinking TM-176

w
P2714 P2714 PRESS CONTROL SOL D Blinking TM-179

P2722 P2722 PRESS CONTROL SOL E Blinking TM-181
w
P2731 P2731 PRESS CONTROL SOL F Blinking TM-184

P2765 P2765 INP/TRBN SPD SEN B CIR Blinking TM-187
P2776 — UPSHIFT SW CIRCUIT — TM-190
P2780 — DOWNSHIFT SW CIRCUIT — TM-192
U1000 — CAN COMM CIRCUIT — TM-57
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
TM-234
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
Symptom Table (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020008
B
This chart is classified into “output device system”, “intermediate device/check and test/adjustment system”,
“output signal system”, “input signal system” and “part check and replacement” per symptom. Checking all the
classifications in numerical order allows you to find malfunctions efficiently. C
Output device system TM

1st-Reverse shift actuator

2nd-4th shift actuator
3rd-5th shift actuator
Multifunction display
E
6th-N shift actuator
Information display
Clutch lubrication
Shift lock device

Gear lubrication
Range indicator
Items
Clutch A
Clutch B
F
Parking
eu
G
XX-XX, "*****", XX-XX, "*****"

Reference
r e. H
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
to
I
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-200
r-s
Shock generated at shifting is great 1 2 J

t
.g
1st gear 1 2
Creep is great 2nd gear 1 2
w
K
Reverse 1 2
w
→1st gear 1 2
→2nd gear 1 2 L
w
The gear is hard to engage or the gearshift is →3rd gear 2 1

slow
→4th gear 2 1
(The position lamp blinks at M range or re-
M
verse gear) →5th gear 2 1
→6th gear 1 2
→Reverse gear 1 N
TM-235


Information display
Clutch lubrication
Shift lock device

Gear lubrication
Range indicator
Items
Clutch A
Clutch B
Parking
XX-XX, "*****", XX-XX, "*****"

Reference
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-200
1st gear 1
2nd gear 1
eu
3rd gear 1
The engine races
4th gear 1
e.
or the clutch slips
5th gear 1
6th gear
r
1
to
Reverse 1
Start and lockup
1st gear 1 2
r-s
2nd gear 1 2
3rd gear 1 2
t
Noise and vibration

.g
4th gear 1 2
are great
5th gear 1 2
w
6th gear 1 2
w
Reverse 1 2
→1st gear 1
w
→2nd gear 1
The engine races →3rd gear 1

or the clutch slips →4th gear 1
→5th gear 1
→6th gear 1
When shifting gears
→1st gear 1 2
→2nd gear 1 2
Noise and vibration →3rd gear 1 2

are great →4th gear 1 2
→5th gear 1 2
→6th gear 1 2
TM-236
Oil leakage
Learning error
Shift lock error

Poor starting engine
Back-up lamp ON error
The noise and vibration
sor
Items
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Reference
w
Clutch touch point
Gear position sen-

w
w
1st gear
6th gear
5th gear
4th gear
Reverse
3rd gear
Clutch B
Clutch A
2nd gear
.g
t
TM-291 Clutch A
1
TM-237
r-s
TM-291 Clutch B
1
TM-291 6th-N shift actuator
1
to
TM-291 2nd-4th shift actuator
1
1
r
TM-291 1st-Reverse shift actuator
1
1
e.
TM-291 3rd-5th shift actuator
1
1
TM-291 Clutch lubrication

eu
1 TM-291 Gear lubrication
TM-291 Parking
1 TM-200 Shift lock device
XX-XX, "*****" Range indicator
XX-XX, "*****" Shift position indicator
XX-XX, "*****" Transmission warning light
XX-XX, "*****", XX-XX, "*****" Multifunction display
XX-XX, "*****" Information display

[TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
L
F
P
K
E
B
A
N
H
C
O
G
M
TM


Information display
Clutch lubrication
Shift lock device

Gear lubrication
Range indicator
Items
Clutch A
Clutch B
Parking
XX-XX, "*****", XX-XX, "*****"

Reference
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-291
TM-200
R mode lamp 1
Set-up switch SNOW mode
eu
1
lamp
Shift position indicator 1
Gear position
r e. 1
1
to
A/M range 1
Multi-function dis- Transmission oil
r-s
play 1
pressure
Transmission oil
1
temperature
t
.g
SHIFT TO THE
1
P RANGE
w
CHECK POSI-
Display/illumination er- TION OF SHIFT 1
w
ror LEVER
T/M OIL TEMP
w
HIGH DE-
1
CREASE
SPEED
T/M CLUTCH
Information display TEMP HIGH
STOP VEHI-
1
CLE UNTIL
WARNING
TURNS OFF
T/M SYSTEM
MALFUNC-
1
TION VISIT
DEALER
T/M SYSTEM
CHECK IN 1
PROCESS
Range change error
Shift lever
A/M range change error
TM-238
slow
verse gear)
Paddle shifter
Creep is great
Set-up switch error
Items
Items
Shock generated at shifting is great

Reference
Reference
w
Up switch error
(The position lamp blinks at M range or re-

Down switch error
The gear is hard to engage or the gearshift is

w
Intermediate device/check and test/adjustment system

w
1st gear
Reverse
2nd gear
→1st gear
→6th gear
→5th gear
→4th gear
→3rd gear
→2nd gear
.g
→Reverse gear
t
TM-291 Clutch A
XX-XX, "*****" Back-up lamp relay
TM-239
r-s
TM-291 Clutch B
TM-291 6th-N shift actuator

XX-XX, "*****" Starter relay
to
TM-291 2nd-4th shift actuator
r
TM-265 Oil leakage (oil level) TM-291 1st-Reverse shift actuator
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e.
TM-291 3rd-5th shift actuator
TM-265 Oil status TM-291 Clutch lubrication

eu
TM-291 Gear lubrication

TM-41 Gear position test or disengaging the gear
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
TM-291 Parking
TM-200 Shift lock device

TM-41 Clutch gear learning
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
XX-XX, "*****" Range indicator
XX-XX, "*****" Shift position indicator

TM-41 Clutch touch point
2
2
2
2
XX-XX, "*****" Transmission warning light
XX-XX, "*****", XX-XX, "*****" Multifunction display

TM-41 Adjust clutch capacity
XX-XX, "*****" Information display
L
F
P
K
E
B
A
N
H
C
O
G
M
TM
Gear position test or disengaging the gear

Items
Adjust clutch capacity

Oil leakage (oil level)
Clutch gear learning

Back-up lamp relay
Clutch touch point

Starter relay
Oil status
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
Reference
TM-265
TM-265
TM-41
TM-41
TM-41
TM-41
1st gear 1 2 2 1
eu
2nd gear 1 2 2 1
3rd gear 1 2 2 1
The engine races
4th gear 1 2 2 1
e.
or the clutch slips
5th gear r 1 2 2 1
6th gear 1 2 2 1
to
Reverse 1 2 2 1
Start and lockup
r-s
1st gear 1 2 2
2nd gear 1 2 2
3rd gear 1 2 2
t
Noise and vibration

.g
4th gear 1 2 2
are great
5th gear 1 2 2
w
6th gear 1 2 2
w
Reverse 1 2 2
→1st gear 1 2 1 3 2
w
→2nd gear 1 2 1 3 2
The engine races →3rd gear 1 2 1 3 2

or the clutch slips →4th gear 1 2 1 3 2
→5th gear 1 2 1 3 2
→6th gear 1 2 1 3 2
When shifting gears
→1st gear 1 2 1 3 2
→2nd gear 1 2 1 3 2
Noise and vibration →3rd gear 1 2 1 3 2

are great →4th gear 1 2 1 3 2
→5th gear 1 2 1 3 2
→6th gear 1 2 1 3 2
TM-240

A
Items


Back-up lamp relay
C
Clutch touch point

Starter relay
Oil status
TM
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
E
Reference
TM-265
TM-265
TM-41
TM-41
TM-41
TM-41
F
Clutch A 1 1
Clutch touch point
eu
Clutch B 1 1 G
1st gear 1 2 1
2nd gear 1 2 1
Learning error
Gear position sen-
sor
3rd gear
4th gear
r e. 1
1
2
2
1
1
H
to
5th gear 1 2 1
I
r-s
6th gear 1 2 1
Reverse 1 2 1
The noise and vibration are generated 1 2 J
t
.g
Oil leakage occurs 1

Shift lock error
w
K
Poor starting engine 1
w
Back-up lamp ON error 1

L
w
TM-241

Items


Back-up lamp relay
Clutch touch point

Starter relay
Oil status
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
Reference
TM-265
TM-265
TM-41
TM-41
TM-41
TM-41
R mode lamp
Set-up switch
eu
SNOW mode
lamp
Gear position
r e.
to
A/M range
Multifunction dis- Transmission oil
r-s
play pressure
Transmission oil
temperature
t
.g
SHIFT TO THE
P RANGE
w
CHECK POSI-
Display/illumination er- TION OF SHIFT
w
ror LEVER
T/M OIL TEMP
w
HIGH DE-
CREASE
SPEED
T/M CLUTCH
STOP VEHI-
CLE UNTIL
WARNING
TURNS OFF
T/M SYSTEM
MALFUNC-
TION VISIT
DEALER
T/M SYSTEM
CHECK IN
PROCESS
Range change error
Shift lever
TM-242
Paddle shifter
Creep is great
Output signal system
Set-up switch error
the gearshift is slow
range or reverse gear)

Items
The gear is hard to engage or
(The position lamp blinks at M

Reference
Items

Reference
w
Up switch error
1st gear
Reverse
2nd gear
Down switch error
→1st gear
→6th gear
→5th gear
→4th gear
→3rd gear
→2nd gear
w
→Reverse gear
w
TM-126 Clutch A pressure S/V
1
TM-147 Clutch B pressure S/V
1
1
1
.g
TM-184 Line pressure S/V
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
t
TM-181 Lubricating flow S/V
2
2
2
2
TM-243
r-s
TM-132 Shift S/V 1
3
1
3
TM-135 Shift S/V 2
1
3
1
to XX-XX, "*****" Starter relay
TM-138 Shift S/V 3
1
1
3
3
r
TM-141 Shift S/V 4
3
3
1
1
TM-265 Oil leakage (oil level)
e.
TM-144 Sequence S/V
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
TM-155 Axis A feed pressure S/V
4
4
4
TM-265 Oil status
eu
TM-176 Axis B feed pressure S/V
4
4
4
4
TM-200 Shift lock solenoid TM-41 Gear position test or disengaging the gear
TM-197 R lamp (Set-up switch)
TM-197 SNOW lamp (Set-up switch) TM-41 Clutch gear learning

TM-41 Clutch touch point
XX-XX, "*****" Combination meter

TM-41 Adjust clutch capacity
TM-57 ECM (Torque request)
L
F
P
K
E
B
A
N
H
C
O
G
M
TM
SNOW lamp (Set-up switch)

Axis A feed pressure S/V
Axis B feed pressure S/V
R lamp (Set-up switch)
ECM (Torque request)

Clutch A pressure S/V
Clutch B pressure S/V
Lubricating flow S/V
Back-up lamp relay
Combination meter
Shift lock solenoid
Line pressure S/V
Items
Sequence S/V
Starter relay
Shift S/V 1
Shift S/V 2
Shift S/V 3
Shift S/V 4
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
Reference
TM-126
TM-147
TM-184
TM-181
TM-132
TM-135
TM-138
TM-141
TM-144
TM-155
TM-176
TM-200
TM-197
TM-197
TM-57
1st gear 1 3 2
2nd gear 1 3 2
3rd gear 1 3 2
The engine
races or the 4th gear 1 3 2
clutch slips
5th gear 1 3 2
eu
6th gear 1 3 2
Reverse 1 3 2
e.
Start and lockup
1st gear 1 4 2 3
2nd gear 1 4 2 3
r
to
3rd gear 1 4 2 3
Noise and vi-
bration are 4th gear 1 4 2 3
r-s
great
5th gear 1 4 2 3
6th gear 1 4 2 3
t
Reverse 1 4 2 3
.g
→1st gear 1 3 2 4
w
→2nd gear 1 3 2 4
The engine →3rd gear 1 3 2 4
w
races or the
clutch slips →4th gear 1 3 2 4
w
→5th gear 1 3 2 4
When shifting →6th gear 1 3 2 4

gears →1st gear 2 1 6 3 5 4 7
→2nd gear 1 2 6 3 4 5 7
Noise and vi- →3rd gear 2 1 6 3 5 4 7
bration are
great →4th gear 1 2 6 3 4 5 7
→5th gear 2 1 6 3 5 4 7
→6th gear 1 2 6 3 4 5 7
TM-244
Learning error
Shift lock error

Oil leakage occurs

point
sensor
Items
Reference
Clutch touch
Gear position
The noise and vibration are generated

w
1st gear
6th gear
5th gear
4th gear
3rd gear
Reverse
Clutch B
Clutch A
2nd gear
w
w 1
TM-126 Clutch A pressure S/V
TM-147 Clutch B pressure S/V

1
.g
TM-184 Line pressure S/V
1
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
t
TM-181 Lubricating flow S/V
TM-245
r-s
TM-132 Shift S/V 1
3
1
3
1 TM-135 Shift S/V 2

3
1
to
1 TM-138 Shift S/V 3
3
1
3
r
TM-141 Shift S/V 4
3
1
3
1
e.
TM-144 Sequence S/V
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
TM-155 Axis A feed pressure S/V

2
2
4
4
4
eu
TM-176 Axis B feed pressure S/V

2
2
4
4
4
4
TM-200 Shift lock solenoid

1
TM-197 R lamp (Set-up switch)
TM-197 SNOW lamp (Set-up switch)

1

1
XX-XX, "*****" Combination meter
TM-57 ECM (Torque request)

L
F
P
K
E
B
A
N
H
C
O
G
M
TM
SNOW lamp (Set-up switch)

Axis A feed pressure S/V
Axis B feed pressure S/V
R lamp (Set-up switch)
ECM (Torque request)

Clutch A pressure S/V
Clutch B pressure S/V
Lubricating flow S/V
Back-up lamp relay
Combination meter
Shift lock solenoid
Line pressure S/V
Items
Sequence S/V
Starter relay
Shift S/V 1
Shift S/V 2
Shift S/V 3
Shift S/V 4
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
XX-XX, "*****"
Reference
TM-126
TM-147
TM-184
TM-181
TM-132
TM-135
TM-138
TM-141
TM-144
TM-155
TM-176
TM-200
TM-197
TM-197
TM-57
R mode lamp 1
Set-up
switch SNOW mode
1
lamp
Shift position indicator 1
Transmission warning light 1
eu
Gear position 1
A/M range 1
e.
Multifunction Transmission oil
display 1
pressure r
Transmission oil
1
to
temperature
SHIFT TO P
r-s
1
RANGE
CHECK POSI-
TION OF SHIFT 1
t
Display/illumina-
LEVER
.g
tion error
T/M OIL TEMP
w
HIGH DE-
1
CREASE
w
SPEED
T/M CLUTCH
w
Information TEMP HIGH

display STOP VEHI-
1
CLE UNTIL
WARNING
TURNS OFF
T/M SYSTEM
MALFUNC-
1
TION VISIT
DEALER
T/M SYSTEM
CHECK IN 1 2
PROCESS
Range change error
Shift lever
Up switch error
Paddle shifter
Down switch error
Set-up switch error
TM-246
Input signal system
A/M range change switch

A
Paddle signal DOWN
ECM (engine torque)

ECM (engine speed)
1st-Reverse position

6th-Neutral position
Output shaft speed

Clutch A pressure
Clutch B pressure
Paddle signal UP
2nd-4th position
3rd-5th position
Oil temperature
Clutch A speed
Clutch B speed
B
Line pressure
Set-up switch
Items
Range signal
C
TM-160
TM-190
TM-192
TM-153
TM-163
TM-166
TM-169
TM-108
TM-117
TM-187
TM-62
TM-99
TM-91
TM-79
TM-82
TM-68
TM-73
TM-87
TM-58
Reference
TM
Shock generated at shifting is great 2 4 3 1 5

1st gear 2 4 3 1 5 E
Creep is great 2nd gear 2 4 3 1 5
Reverse 2 4 3 1 5
→1st gear 2 3 1 F
→2nd gear 3 2 1
→3rd gear 2 1
eu
The gear is hard to engage or G
the gearshift is slow →4th gear 2 1
(The position lamp blinks at M
→5th gear 2 1
e.
range or reverse gear)
→6th gear 2 1 H
→Reverse
r 2 1
to
gear
1st gear 2 1 3 3 I
r-s
2nd gear 2 1 3 3
3rd gear 2 1 3 3
The engine rac- J
t
es or the clutch 4th gear 2 1 3 3

.g
slips
5th gear 2 1 3 3
w
6th gear 2 1 3 3 K
Reverse 2 1 3 3
w
Start and
lockup 1st gear 2 2 1 3 3
L
w
2nd gear 2 2 1 3 3
3rd gear 2 2 1 3 3
Noise and vibra-
tion are great
4th gear 2 2 1 3 3 M
5th gear 2 2 1 3 3
6th gear 2 2 1 3 3
N
Reverse 2 2 1 3 3
TM-247
Paddle signal DOWN
ECM (engine torque)

ECM (engine speed)

Output shaft speed

Clutch A pressure
Clutch B pressure
Paddle signal UP
2nd-4th position
3rd-5th position
Oil temperature
Clutch A speed
Clutch B speed
Line pressure
Set-up switch
Items
Range signal
TM-160
TM-190
TM-192
TM-153
TM-163
TM-166
TM-169
TM-108
TM-117
TM-187
TM-62
TM-99
TM-91
TM-79
TM-82
TM-68
TM-73
TM-87
TM-58
Reference
→1st gear 2 1 3 5
→2nd gear 2 1 3 5
The engine rac- →3rd gear 2 1 3 5
es or the clutch
slips →4th gear 2 1 3 5
→5th gear 2 1 3 5
When shift- →6th gear 2 1 3 5

ing gears →1st gear 2 2 1 3
eu
→2nd gear 2 2 1 3
Noise and vibra- →3rd gear 2 2 1 3
e.
tion are great →4th gear 2 2 1 3
→5th gear r 2 2 1 3
→6th gear
to
2 2 1 3
Clutch touch Clutch A 2 4 3 1

r-s
point Clutch B 2 4 3 1
1st gear 2 4 3 1
t
2nd gear 2 4 3 1
.g
Learning er-
3rd gear 2 4 3 1
ror
Gear position
w
4th gear 2 4 3 1
sensor
5th gear 2 4 3 1
w
6th gear 2 4 3 1
w
Reverse 2 4 3 1
Oil leakage occurs
Shift lock error 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
Poor starting engine 1 2
Back-up lamp ON error 1 3 3 3 3 2
TM-248

A
Paddle signal DOWN
ECM (engine torque)

ECM (engine speed)

Output shaft speed

Clutch A pressure
Clutch B pressure
Paddle signal UP
2nd-4th position
3rd-5th position
Oil temperature
Clutch A speed
Clutch B speed
Line pressure
Set-up switch
Items
Range signal
B
TM-160
TM-190
TM-192
TM-153
TM-163
TM-166
TM-169
TM-108
TM-117
TM-187
TM-62
TM-99
TM-91
TM-79
TM-82
TM-68
TM-73
TM-87
TM-58
Reference
TM
R mode
1 2 3
lamp
Set-up switch
SNOW
1 2 3
E
mode lamp
Shift position indicator 1 1 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 3
Transmission warning light F
Gear posi-
1 1 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 3
tion
eu
A/M range 1 1 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 3 G
Multi-function Transmis-
sion oil pres- 1
e.
display
sure H
Transmis-
r
to
sion oil tem- 1
perature I
r-s
SHIFT TO
THE P 1 2
RANGE
J
t
CHECK PO-
.g
Display/illu- SITION OF
mination er- 1 2
SHIFT LE-
w
ror VER K
T/M OIL
w
TEMP HIGH
DE- 1 L
w
CREASE
SPEED
T/M
Information dis- CLUTCH
M
play TEMP HIGH
STOP VEHI- 2 2 1 3 3
CLE UNTIL N
WARNING
TURNS OFF
T/M SYS-
TEM MAL- O
FUNCTION
VISIT DEAL-
ER
P
T/M SYS-
TEM
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CHECK IN
PROCESS
Range change error 1
Shift lever
A/M range change error 1
TM-249
slow
shifter
Paddle
verse gear)
Creep is great
Set-up switch error
Part check and replacement

Items
Reference
Up switch error
Down switch error

Items
Reference
w
The gear is hard to engage or the gearshift is
(The position lamp blinks at the M range or re-

w TM-62 Range signal
w TM-160 A/M range change switch
1st gear
Reverse
2nd gear
→1st gear
→6th gear
→5th gear
→4th gear
→3rd gear
TM-190 Paddle signal UP
1
→2nd gear
.g
TM-192 Paddle signal DOWN
1
→Reverse gear
t
TM-153 Set-up switch
1
TM-272 Shift lever
TM-250
r-s
TM-163 Clutch A pressure
TM-166 Clutch B pressure

TM-277
toPaddle shifter
TM-169 Line pressure
r
TM-99 1st-Reverse position
TM-153 Set-up switch
e.
TM-108 2nd-4th position
TM-117 3rd-5th position

eu
TM-297, TM-288 Oil seal, gasket, plane washer

TM-91 6th-Neutral position
TM-293 Flywheel housing assembly TM-79 Clutch A speed
TM-187 Clutch B speed

TM-279 Oil pan TM-82 Output shaft speed
TM-68 Park position switch

TM-283, TM-285 Heat exchanger system TM-73 Oil temperature
TM-87 ECM (engine speed)

TM-291 Transmission assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TM-58 ECM (engine torque)
Oil seal, gasket, plane washer

A
Flywheel housing assembly
Heat exchanger system
Transmission assembly
Items B
Paddle shifter
Set-up switch
Shift lever
Oil pan
C
TM-297, TM-288
TM-283, TM-285
TM
Reference
TM-272
TM-277
TM-153
TM-293
TM-279
TM-291
E
1st gear 1
2nd gear 1 F
3rd gear 1
The engine races or
4th gear 1
eu
the clutch slips G
5th gear 1
6th gear 1
Start and lockup

Reverse
1st gear
r e. 1
1
H
to
2nd gear 1
I
3rd gear 1
r-s
Noise and vibration

4th gear 1
are great
5th gear 1 J
t
.g
6th gear 1
Reverse 1
w
→1st gear 1 K
→2nd gear
w
The engine races or →3rd gear 1

L
w
the clutch slips →4th gear 1

→5th gear 1
→6th gear 1 M
When shifting gears
→1st gear 1
→2nd gear 1
N
Noise and vibration →3rd gear 1
are great →4th gear 1
→5th gear 1 O
→6th gear 1
TM-251
Items
Paddle shifter
Set-up switch
Shift lever
Oil pan
TM-297, TM-288
TM-283, TM-285
Reference
TM-272
TM-277
TM-153
TM-293
TM-279
TM-291
Clutch A 1
Clutch touch point
Clutch B 1
1st gear 1
2nd gear 1
eu
Learning error 3rd gear 1
Gear position sensor 4th gear 1
5th gear
6th gear
r e. 1
1
to
Reverse 1
The noise and vibration are generated 1 2
r-s
Oil leakage occurs 1 2 2

Shift lock error 1
t
.g

w
w
w
TM-252

A
Items B
Paddle shifter
Set-up switch
Shift lever
Oil pan
C
TM-297, TM-288
TM-283, TM-285
TM
Reference
TM-272
TM-277
TM-153
TM-293
TM-279
TM-291
E
R mode lamp
Set-up switch SNOW mode F
lamp
eu
Transmission warning light G
Gear position
e.
A/M range
H
Multi-function dis- Transmission oil r
play pressure
to
Transmission oil
I
temperature
r-s
SHIFT TO THE
P RANGE
J
t
CHECK POSI-
.g
Display/illumination er- TION OF SHIFT

ror LEVER
w
T/M OIL TEMP

K
HIGH DE-
w
CREASE
SPEED L
w
T/M CLUTCH
STOP VEHI-
CLE UNTIL M
WARNING
TURNS OFF
T/M SYSTEM N
MALFUNC-
TION VISIT
DEALER
O
T/M SYSTEM
CHECK IN
PROCESS
Range change error 1 P
Shift lever
A/M range change error 1
Up switch error 1
Paddle shifter
Down switch error 1
Set-up switch error 1
Shock generated at shifting is great 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
TM-253
Main symptoms
Items Main symptoms

1st gear
—
Creep is great 2nd gear
Reverse
• 1st gear is not engaged
→1st gear
• 3rd gear is not released
• 2nd gear is not engaged
→2nd gear
• 4th gear is not released
• 3rd gear is not engaged
→3rd gear • 1st gear is not released
The gear is hard to engage or the gearshift is slow
• 4th gear is not engaged
(The position lamp blinks at the M range or reverse
→4th gear • 2nd gear is not released
gear)
→5th gear
• 3rd gear is not released
eu
→6th gear
• Reverse gear is not engaged
e.
→Reverse gear
• 1st gear is not released
1st gear
r
to
2nd gear
3rd gear
r-s
The engine races or • Engine races

4th gear
the clutch slips • Clutch slippage
5th gear
t
.g
6th gear
Reverse
Start and lockup
w
1st gear
w
2nd gear
3rd gear
w
Noise and vibration

4th gear Clutch judder
are great
5th gear
6th gear
Reverse
→1st gear
→2nd gear
The engine races or →3rd gear

the clutch slips →4th gear
→5th gear
→6th gear
When shifting gears —
→1st gear
→2nd gear
Noise and vibration →3rd gear

are great →4th gear
→5th gear
→6th gear
TM-254
Items Main symptoms
A
Shock or slippage is generated during gear shift to 2nd, 4th,
Clutch A
6th gears after learning
Clutch touch point
Shock or slippage is generated during gear shift to 1st, 3rd,
Clutch B B
5th gears after learning
1st gear The gear shift to 1st gear cannot be performed after learning
2nd gear The gear shift to 2nd gear cannot be performed after learning
Learning error C
3rd gear The gear shift to 3rd gear cannot be performed after learning
Gear position sensor 4th gear The gear shift to 4th gear cannot be performed after learning
5th gear The gear shift to 5th gear cannot be performed after learning TM
6th gear The gear shift to 6th gear cannot be performed after learning
Reverse The gear shift to reverse gear cannot be performed
E
—
Oil leakage occurs
The shift lever cannot be released from the P position after F
Shift lock error
starting the engine
The starter does not operate even if the shift lever is in the P
or N position
eu
G
The back-up lamp does not turn on when the shift lever is se-
lected to the R position
Set-up switch
R mode lamp
SNOW mode lamp
r e.
Set-up switch does not turns on/off even if the switch is op-
erated
H
to
Shift position indicator Shift position indicator does not illuminate
• The indicator does not illuminates and blinks even if the I
r-s
malfunction occurs
• The indicator illuminates and blinks even if the DTC does
not occur
J
t
Gear position
.g
Not displayed
A/M range
w
• Not displayed K
Multi-function display Transmission oil
• The value does not change even if the engine speed
pressure
w
changes
Transmission oil • Not displayed L
w
temperature • The value does not change

SHIFT TO THE P
Display/illumination error RANGE
M
CHECK POSI-
TION OF SHIFT
LEVER
N
T/M OIL TEMP
HIGH DE-
CREASE SPEED
T/M CLUTCH
O
Information display TEMP HIGH The indication does not turn off
STOP VEHICLE
UNTIL WARNING P
TURNS OFF
T/M SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION
VISIT DEALER
T/M SYSTEM
CHECK IN PRO-
CESS
TM-255
Items Main symptoms
Range change error The range selection cannot be performed
Shift lever The A/M range change with the shift lever cannot be per-
formed
Up switch error The upshift is not performed at the M range
Paddle shifter
Down switch error The downshift is not performed at the M range
Set-up switch error The mode change cannot be performed
Shock generated at shifting is great Deformation, boring, clacks, oil leakage
eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-256
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000004110738
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. TM
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIRBAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
F
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIRBAG”.
eu
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser- G
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
Aluminum Die-Casting Parts Handling r e. INFOID:0000000004110737
H
to
PROHIBITION OF WELDING OR BEATING REPAIR
• Material made of aluminum die-casting parts is heat-treated and looses strength when being exposed to I
r-s
welding heat. Do not perform welding repair for cracks, damage or others.
• For aluminum die-casting parts deformation, do not perform repair by beating. Always repair by replacement
as an assembly. J
t
.g
CRACK CHECK
When the vehicle is damaged, always perform a visual deformation check and a crack check.
w
K
Crack Check Procedures
For a crack check, use dye penetrant inspection fluid (pre-cleaning fluid, penetrant fluid and developer fluid).
w
CAUTION:
Always perform a crack check in accordance with the procedures specified by the manufacturer of the L
w
dye penetrant inspection fluid.

1. Spray pre-cleaning fluid on the checking surface for cleaning.
2. Spray penetrant fluid on the checking surface and wait until the penetrant fluid soaks into any cracks. M
3. Wipe off excessive penetrant fluid, and then also lightly wipe off penetrant fluid using a wet cloth.
4. Spray developer fluid on the checking surface.
N
5. Cracks, if any, are dyed red in color.
STRAY CURRENT CORROSION
• Corrosion occurs to aluminum die-casting parts by the stray current corrosion phenomenon, when directly O
contacting other parts made of steel. Always apply anti-stray current corrosion paint (primer) on the mount-
ing surface.
• Clean mounting surface to prevent any foreign matter, steel powder or others from being mixed in. Always
apply the specified adhesive when installing. P
• Corrosion by stray current corrosion may occur when installing with any other bolts than the specified bolt.
Always use the specified bolt that is surface treated.
• When loosening the specified bolt that is tightened, the treated surface may peel. Never reuse the specified
bolt that is tightened once.
TIGHTENING TORQUE CONTROL
TM-257
PRECAUTIONS
Material made of aluminum die-casting parts is soft in term of hardness. Tightening torque must be controlled
exactly as specified. Always use a torque wrench to install any part to the specified tightening torque.
WARNING:
Never use a power tool to remove or tighten bolts for aluminum die-casting part.
General Precautions INFOID:0000000004020011
• Use “Genuine NISSAN Transmission oil R35 special”.

• Work in a clean workplace.
• Avoid using cotton gloves or a waste cloth to prevent the entry of lint. Use paper towel.
• Check for the correct status prior to removal and installation, disassembly and assembly.
• Use genuine NISSAN parts for replacement.
• Do not drop foreign matter into the transmission assembly inside.
• Check for damage, breakage and twist when replacing the O-ring and gaskets, etc.
• Check that no dirt is present on the mounting area when installing the parts.
• Check that tools and shop waste cloths are not left after finishing service work.
• Check and replace the oil level with the vehicle in a horizontal position.
• Do not reuse drained transmission oil.
• Treat the replaced transmission oil and cleaning oil as waste oil.
Precautions for Replacement of TCM and Transmission Assembly INFOID:0000000004020012
Perform the following learning when the TCM and transmission assembly are replaced.
eu
CLUTCH LEARNING
The transmission applies the standby pressure to clutch A or clutch B after a gear is engaged to reduce the
e.
clutch clearance in order to speed up the response to start-up or gear shift. The stand-by pressure is not
proper after replacing the TCM and transmission assembly. It is necessary for TCM to learn it.
r
to
GEAR LEARNING
The engaged gear position has variations per unit. It is necessary for TCM to learn it after replacing the TCM
r-s
and transmission assembly.

• Refer to TM-8, "TCM REPLACEMENT : Description" when replacing the TCM.
• Refer to TM-9, "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT : Description" when replacing the transmis-
t
sion assembly.
.g
Precautions Before Performing Diagnosis INFOID:0000000004020013

w
Check the following items before performing the diagnosis. Be careful that the applicable item may not always
w
be malfunctioning.
PRECAUTION FOR MECHANISM
w
Mechanism Symptom Use conditions and constraint conditions

If the temperature is high just after sport driving, for exam-
When the temperature is lowered, the noise
ple, a rattle or other noise may be heard at idle or driving
Manual transmission base is reduced.
at a slow speed, because there is less friction.
A click noise may be heard during a gear shift. —
TM-258
PRECAUTIONS
Mechanism Symptom Use conditions and constraint conditions
A
With the vehicle stationary and the shift lever in the A ⇔
M, or R range, when the brake pedal is released, the ve-
hicle enters the status just like partial engagement of Securely depress the brake pedal while the
clutch in vehicles with manual transmission to prepare for vehicle is stopped. B
start-up, and starts moving slowly (or in some circum-
stances, it may not start at all).
If the brake pedal and accelerator pedal are depressed to-
C
gether, under some conditions, the engine may stall or the Therefore, never depress the brake pedal
clutch may overheat, resulting in damage in the transmis- and accelerator pedal together.
sion.
Wet-type multi-plate clutch
• Start the vehicle in 1st gear. TM
• Starting the vehicle in 2nd gear of the M
range is restricted to when starting the
If “starting the vehicle in 2nd gear of M range” or “stop by
vehicle with restrained drive power on an
depressing adjustment of the accelerator pedal on a slope
extremely slippery road such as a snowy
E
using every gear position” is performed, the clutch over-
road.
heats just like vehicles with manual transmission, resulting
• When stopping on a slope, depress the
in damage in the transmission or engine stall.
brake pedal and do not perform a stop- F
ping operation by depressing adjustment
of the accelerator pedal.
1. After the normal temperature is re-
eu
sumed, the slippage feeling and shock G
is reduced.
The following symptoms may occur by oil viscosity restric-
2. During the system check, the shift le-
e.
tion variations due to temperature change.
ver cannot be moved out from the P H
1. A slippage feeling or shock may occur during start-
Electronically controlled hy- position. Therefore, operate the shift
up and gear shift. r
draulic control lever only after the system check indi-
2. At very low temperatures in winter, the system check
to
cator turns off. In addition, operation
time may be prolonged by oil pressure response
noise like a clank may be heard or the I
characteristic variations.
engine speed may drop during the
r-s
system check, but they are not mal-

function.
J
t
In the M range, as the gear shift speed is increased, a

.g
shock or jerky feeling may be felt during start-up and gear —

shift.
w
Mode change Because R mode of the M range is designed to increase K

the shift change speed during sport driving, when driving
—
w
at low vehicle speed and low engine speed, the shift

change time may be rather prolonged.
L
w
Turning with a large steering wheel angle at low tempera-

When straight-ahead driving is resumed or
Rear final drive (mechanical ture increases LSD effect because of high oil viscosity, vi-
the oil temperature increases, the vibrations
LSD) and transfer (E-TS) brations or operation noise caused by tire slippage may
and operation noise are reduced.
occur. M
Because of the engine speed variations due to the air con-
ditioner operation, a rattle or other noise may be heard at —
Lightweight flywheel idle or driving at a slow speed. N
At the engine start or stop, a rattle may be heard. —
PRECAUTIONS FOR SYMPTOM

O
TM-259
PRECAUTIONS
Symptom Cause Action

The system performs the system check of
transmission after the engine starts. There-
fore, the shift lever is not released from the
The shift lever is not released from the P Wait until the system
P range by shift lock even if the driver de-
range. check finishes.
presses the brake during the check. This is
normal. The system check time may be pro-
longed at low oil temperature.
When the engine starts at the N range after
the engine stops at the driving range (A/M
If the engine starts at the
or R range), the vehicle may not start for
N range, the vehicle can
safety. This is normal.
be driven by selecting
• Conditions that the vehicle cannot be
the desired driving
The vehicle cannot be driven after starting driven
range after selecting the
the engine at the N range. - The engine starts at the N range after
P range once. Perform
stopping at the A/M range, and the R
the engine stop or start
range is selected
at the P range for safety
- The engine starts at the N range after
reasons.
stopping at the R range, and the A/M
range is selected
When or after
the engine The oil viscosity is high and the oil flow re- Smooth gear shift is re-
The gear shift takes time at low oil temper-
starts striction is large at low oil temperature, and sumed, when the oil
eu
ature.
the oil pressure response takes time. temperature increases.
If the shift lever shifts to the driving range
e.
(A/M or R range) without the brake pedal Securely depress the
The engine speed fluctuates when the shift
depressed, the clutch becomes the partial brake before shifting the
lever shifts from the N range or P range to
clutch engagement status simultaneously shift lever to the driving
the driving range (A/M, R range) without the
r
with the gear engagement. Therefore, the range (A/M, R range) for
to
brake pedal depressed.
engine load changes. As a result, the en- safety reasons.
gine speed may vary or decrease.
r-s
Start the vehicle in 1st or

reverse gear. On a slip-
pery road, use SNOW
t
The gear position that the vehicle can start

mode of the A range.
.g
is only 1st, 2nd, and reverse gears. The ve-

The vehicle cannot start at any gears higher Start the vehicle in 2nd
hicle cannot start at any gears higher than
than 3rd gear. gear only when you
w
3rd gear because the load for the clutch is

want to start with re-
too great.
strained drive power es-
w
pecially on a slippery
road.
w
Shift the gear only after

The manual shift change is inhibited in or-
No manual upshift is accepted during start- the start-up is finished
der to reduce the load to the clutch during
up. (after the clutch is en-
start-up (until the clutch is engaged).
gaged).
Stop the vehicle to shift
For the purpose of safety and clutch protec- down to 1st gear or se-
A downshift to 1st gear is not accepted dur- tion, a downshift to 1st gear is not accepted lect the A range to enter
ing starting in 2nd gear. during start-up and when the accelerator the automatic shift. Also
pedal is depressed. start the vehicle in 1st
The gear shift is gear.
not performed The oil viscosity is high and the oil flow re- Smooth gear shift is re-
or slow. The gear shift takes time at low oil temper-
striction is large at low oil temperature, and sumed when the oil tem-
ature.
the oil pressure response takes time. perature increases.
• The paddle shifter operation can be per-
formed only in the M range.
• If the engine over revving occurs or the
Use the M range and
The gear shift is not performed even if the specified engine speed is not reached af-
perform gear shift at the
paddle shifter operation is performed. ter a gear shift, the gear shift is inhibited,
proper engine speed.
and the shift position indicator on the
combination meter blinks to warn the
driver.
TM-260
PRECAUTIONS
A
The excessively fast continuous gear shift
Take interval time to
The continuous manual shift is not accept- is prohibited for safety reasons. The gear
continuously operate
ed. shift that can be accepted during the gear
the paddle shifter.
shift is only the next gear shift. B
The downshift is not accepted at stall in 2nd
The stall is prohibited.
gear (under conditions that the vehicle is
The downshift is accept-
stopped with the accelerator pedal and The downshift is not accepted at stall for
brake pedal depressed simultaneously and safety reasons.
ed by stopping the vehi- C
cle with the accelerator
the vehicle is stopped on a slope with the
pedal released.
accelerator pedal depressed).
The predictive pre-shift control provides a TM
waiting gear selection focusing on the full R mode of the M range
The gear shift in R mode of the M range is
sport driving. Therefore in normal driving, it is basically used in sport
slow.
takes time for changing the waiting gear driving.
and the gear shift time may be prolonged. E
In order to provide the operation feeling of Upshift manually or use
No automatic upshift occurs in R mode of
manual transmission, no automatic upshift in Normal mode of the M
the M range.
occurs like manual transmission. range. F
If the automatic upshift
Normal mode of M range performs the au-
is used or a manual gear
tomatic upshift when the specified engine
eu
shift is done a little earli- G
speed is reached. During the automatic up-
In Normal mode of M range, 2 speed gear er, 1-speed gear shift
shift, if a manual upshift intervenes by the
shift is performed for one manual upshift. can be attained. Or, R
paddle shifter, a total of a 2-speed gear shift
mode of the M range
e.
(1-speed automatic gear shift + 1-speed
manual gear shift) is performed.
without automatic up- H
r shift is used.
to
When the vehicle is accelerated rather hard
The gear shift is
While driving in the A range, after the vehi- for merging onto a freeway, or runs on a
not performed Waiting for a certain pe- I
cle is accelerated for merging onto a free- ramp curve with side G applied, the adap-
r-s
or slow. riod of time deactivates

way, for example, the automatic upshift tive shift control works to activate the gear
the gear hold status. Or
does not occur soon after the accelerator hold status in which no gear shift occurs for
upshift manually.
pedal is released. a certain period of time. This symptom stays J
t
longer in R mode than Normal mode.

.g
During a sudden deceleration, if a tire lock With a certain period of

occurs, the actual vehicle speed cannot be time after the tire lock
w
K
During a sudden deceleration, no automatic judged (the vehicle body moves, but the disappears, an automat-
downshift occurs. wheels stop), therefore the appropriate ic gear shift to the ap-
w
gear can no longer be selected. For safety propriate gear is

reasons, a gear shift is inhibited. resumed. L
w
A manual upshift near the engine rev limit

may activate the engine over-rev protection This symptom can be
An upshift near the engine rev limit causes
depending on the timing and lower the en- eliminated by upshifting
a drop of the drive power.
gine torque. Therefore, an upshift at this a little earlier.
M
timing drops the drive power.
Shift shock varies depending on how the
accelerator pedal depressed during a gear N
shift. Because the tuning allows an increase
of the shift speed as the accelerator pedal
travel increases, the shift shock also in-
creases. To prevent shift shock, O
Shock generated by gearshift is great. For example, start the vehicle with the ac- drive with gentle accel-
celerator pedal fully depressed, as the vehi- erator operation.
cle speed increases, shift up to 2nd gear,
P
after that release the accelerator pedal and
shift up to 3rd gear. In this case, compared
to 2nd to 3rd shift shock, 1st to 2nd shift
shock feels larger.
TM-261
PRECAUTIONS
The engine torque and engine speed are
restricted to protect the transmission and
engine at low temperature (the transmis-
If the oil temperature ris-
The drive power is weak when the temper- sion oil temperature is approximately −20°C
es, the restriction of en-
ature becomes extremely cold. The engine (−4°F) or less, or the engine oil temperature
gine torque and engine
does not race. is approximately 0°C (32°F) or less). The
speed is cancelled.
drive power becomes weak or the engine
speed does not increase over the specified
speed.
The engine torque and engine speed are
restricted to protect the transmission and
Reduce the speed or
engine at high temperature (the transmis-
stop the vehicle in a safe
sion oil temperature is approximately 150°C
The drive power is not generated at high oil place until the engine oil
(302°F) or more, or the engine oil tempera-
temperature. The engine does not race. temperature decreases
ture is approximately 135°C (275°F) or
or the transmission
more). The drive power becomes weak or
The drive pow- warning lamp turns off.
the engine speed does not increase over
er is not gener-
the specified speed.
ated or weak,
or the engine The engine torque and engine speed are
races. restricted to protect the clutch at high clutch Reduce the speed or
temperature. The drive power is not trans- stop the vehicle with the
The drive power is not generated at high
eu
mitted when the temperature is further in- brake pedal depressed
clutch temperature.
creased. At this time, the vehicle may move until the transmission
if the brake pedal is not depressed on a warning lamp turns off.
slope.
At very low temperature, hard acceleration

r e.
At low oil temperature, because of a high oil
viscosity, oil pressure response takes time.
Do not perform hard ac-
celeration at low outside
to
Therefore, before the clutch is engaged, the
causes engine racing. temperature with cold
engine speed increases, which may cause
transmission.
an engine racing.
r-s
Under a sudden deceleration, tire lock eas- With a certain period of

After the vehicle stops with a sudden decel- ily occurs. To prevent an engine stall when time after releasing the
eration, depressing the accelerator pedal a lock occurs, the clutch is released. Under accelerator pedal, the
t
.g
causes engine racing. that status, depressing the accelerator ped- clutch is engaged and
al may cause racing. the racing stops.
w
Because the clutch engagement pattern is

adjusted for start-up or acceleration de-
If the accelerator pedal and brake pedal are Do not depress the ac-
w
The engine pending on the accelerator pedal operation,

depressed together to stop, the engine celerator pedal and
stalls. if the brake pedal is depressed together, a
stalls. brake pedal together.
w
force to stop the engine is generated by

braking force and the engine may stall.
When changing from
SNOW mode to R
mode, set to Normal
It cannot be changed from SNOW mode to
mode once, and then
R mode.
press and hold the
switch for 1 second to
The set-up select R mode.
The mode changes by 1 step per 1 mode
switch cannot
switch operation. When changing from R
be changed.
mode to SNOW mode,
set to Normal mode
It cannot be changed from R mode to
once, and then press
SNOW mode.
and hold the switch for 1
second to select SNOW
mode.
Note the history before
The combina-
The oil change history is reset if the power removing the battery.
tion meter dis- The oil change history is reset without oper-
supply is cut off when the battery is re- Perform manual setting
play is ation.
moved at the battery replacement. of history after recon-
malfunctioning.
necting.
TM-262
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020014
B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore number) Description C
Tool name
KV381054S0 Removing the front oil seal
(J-34286) TM
Puller
ZZA0601D
ST30720000 Installing front oil seal F

(J-25405)
Drift
eu
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia.
G
b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia.
KV40104830
ZZA0811D
r e.
Installing front oil seal
H
to
( — )
Drift I
r-s
a: 70 mm (2.76 in) dia.

b: 63.5 mm (2.500) dia.
J
t
.g
ZZA1003D
w
Commercial Service Tools (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004110758

K
w
Tool name Description L

w
Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts
N
PBIC0190E
TM-263
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
Tool name Description
Flange wrench Removing and installing mounting nut of companion
flange
NT035
Puller Removing companion flange
NT077
eu
r e.
to
r-s
t
.g
w
w
w
TM-264
TRANSMISSION OIL
< ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE > [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE A
TRANSMISSION OIL
Inspection INFOID:0000000004020015
B
LEAKAGE CHECK
Visually check transmission assembly surrounding area (oil seal, drain plug, filler plug, transmission case, C
etc.) for smears and leakage of transmission oil.
Oil smears/leakage status from transmission assembly Required operation Reference

TM
*1 Use part cleaner or the equivalent to wipe out
Smears Smears from each part on the transmission assembly —
smeared oil. Then, check for oil leakage.
Check the seal surface condition. Replace the oil
Mating surface between oil pan and case pan gasket only if there is a non-standard condi- TM-279
E
tion. Check for oil leakage.
Check the mounting surface condition. Replace
Park position switch mounting surface the plain washer only if there isn’t any other mal- TM-281 F
functioning condition. Check for oil leakage.
Check the seal surface condition. Replace the O-
eu
Heat exchanger & bracket mounting surface and heat ring at the location where the oil leakage occurred G
TM-285
exchanger mounting bolt if there isn’t any other malfunctioning condition.
Check for oil leakage.
e.
Leakage*2 Check the oil seal mounting surface and sliding
H
surface condition. Replace the front oil seal only if
Front oil seal r TM-288
there isn’t any other malfunctioning condition.
to
Check for oil leakage.
Drain plug Replace the drain plug. Check for oil leakage. TM-279 I
r-s
Replace the filler plug gasket. Check for oil leak-

Filler plug TM-297
age.
Transmission harness connector Replace the transmission assembly. TM-291 J
t
.g
• 3rd-5th check pin

Replace the plain washer or O-ring. Check for oil
• Idler bolt TM-297
leakage.
w
• Plug K
• *1: When the oil does not drop
w
• *2: When the oil drops

L
w
CONDITION CHECK
Remove the filler plug, insert a finger into the filler hole, and judge the oil conditions from the transmission oil
applied to the inside of the transmission case.
CAUTION: M
Be careful not to cut the finger with edges.
Transmission oil status Possible cause Required operation N

Change the transmission oil. Check the trans-
Varnish-like condition (It is as thick
Clutch is burned. mission assembly or any other parts on the ve-
as varnish).
hicle. O
Water is mixed in the fluid.
Example:
Change the transmission oil. Check for flooded
Milky or cloudy • Inflow of engine coolant by internal explo-
area. P
sion of heat exchanger
• Inflow of water from breather by flood, etc.
Change the transmission oil. Check the trans-
A large amount of metal particles are Sliding portions in the transmission assembly
mission assembly operation for any malfunc-
contained in the fluid. are excessively worn.
tioning condition.
TM-265
TRANSMISSION OIL
Draining INFOID:0000000004020016
1. Remove the front diffuser. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".

2. Remove the heat insulator.
3. Remove the filler plug ( ).
NNDIA0018ZZ
4. Remove the drain plug (1) and drain tube (2) from the oil pan,
and then drain the transmission oil.
5. Install the drain tube to the oil pan. Refer to TM-279, "Exploded
View".
eu
r e.
to
NNDIA0033ZZ
Filling
r-s
INFOID:0000000004020017
REPLACEMENT/ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
t
NOTE:
.g
Replace the filler plug gasket and drain plug with new ones after oil level adjustment.
1. Remove the filler plug ( ) and drain plug, and then fill with the
w
transmission oil until it leaks from the drain hole.

w
Transmission oil : Refer to TM-299, "General

w
Specification".
CAUTION:
• Always use the specified transmission oil. In addition,
always use the filler after cleaning. If use/mixed use/mis-
use of the transmission oil other than the specified brand
occurs, the original performance cannot be obtained or it
may cause serious malfunctions. NNDIA0018ZZ
• Check that dust does not mix.

• Always use paper towels. Never use waste cloth.
2. Install the filler plug and drain plug. Refer to TM-291, "Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)"
(filler plug), TM-279, "Exploded View" (drain plug).
3. Start the engine and select the M range.
4. With depressing the brake pedal, shift the paddle shifter to the N range → M range, 1st gear (wait for 5
seconds) → M range, 2nd gear (wait for 5 seconds) → M range, 1st gear → N range at idle.
5. Stop the engine.
6. Remove the filler plug and drain plug, and then fill with the transmission oil until it leaks from the drain
hole.
(filler plug), TM-279, "Exploded View" (drain plug).
8. Install the heat insulator.
TM-266
TRANSMISSION OIL
9. Start the engine and run it at idle. Run the engine until the oil temperature reaches 50°C (122°F) while
checking FLUID TEMP in “DATA MONITOR” of CONSULT-III. A
11. Stop the engine and wait for 5 minutes. B
12. Remove the drain plug. Install the drain plug when the transmission oil begins to drip (1 drop/1 second).
Refer to TM-279, "Exploded View".
CAUTION: C
• Perform from step 11 to step 12 within 25 minutes.
• Repeat the procedure from step 6 if the transmission oil does not leak from the drain hole.
• Never reuse drain plug.
TM
13. Replace the filler plug gasket with new ones.
CAUTION:
Never reuse filler plug gasket.
E
14. Install the front diffuser. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
REFILL ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
NOTE: F
Replace the filler plug gasket and drain plug with new ones after oil level adjustment.
eu
G
3. Start the engine and select the M range.
5. Stop the engine. r e.

seconds) → M range, 2nd gear (wait for 5 seconds) → M range, 1st gear → N range at idle. H
to
6. Remove the filler plug ( ) and drain plug, and then fill with the
transmission oil until it leaks from the drain hole. I
r-s
Transmission oil : Refer to TM-299, "General

Specification". J
t
CAUTION:
.g
• Always use the specified transmission oil. In addition,

always use the filler after cleaning. If use/mixed use/mis-
w
K
use of non-specified transmission oil other than the spec-
ified brand occurs, the original performance cannot be
w
obtained or it may cause serious malfunctions. NNDIA0018ZZ
L
w
• Check that dust does not mix.

• Always use paper towels. Never use waste cloth.
(filler plug), TM-279, "Exploded View" (drain plug). M
8. Install the heat insulator.
9. Start the engine and run it at idle. Run the engine until the oil temperature reaches 50°C (122°F) while
checking FLUID TEMP in “DATA MONITOR” of CONSULT-III. N
11. Stop the engine and wait for 5 minutes. O
12. Remove the drain plug. Install the drain plug when the transmission oil begins to drip the drop status (1
drop/1 second). Refer to TM-279, "Exploded View".
CAUTION: P
• Perform from step 11 to step 12 within 25 minutes.
• Repeat the procedure from step 6 if the transmission oil does not leak from the drain hole.
• Never reuse drain plug.
13. Replace the filler plug gasket with new ones.
CAUTION:
Never reuse filler plug gasket.
14. Install the front diffuser. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
TM-267
SHIFT POSITION
SHIFT POSITION
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004020018
INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON at the shift lever P position.
2. The shift lever can shift from the P position to the R position when the brake pedal is depressed. Alterna-
tively, the shift lever cannot shift from the P position to the R position without the brake pedal depressed.
3. Operate the shift lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. When the shift lever is operated, a click is felt, and the fixed position is correct and corresponds to the shift
position indicator in the combination meter
5. Check that the shift lever is shifted through all the shift positions
in the manner shown in the figure.
A : Depress the brake pedal. Press and operate the knob button.
B : Press and operate the knob button.
C : Operate without condition.
D : Automatic return.
6. Check in the P and N positions that the knob button can be
eu
operated without sticking when the button is pressed without the
shift lever pressed forward and backward. NNDIA0020JP
e.
7. Check that in the R position the shift lever can be operated with-
out sticking when the shift lever is operated left and right. r
8. The back-up lamp can turn on and the reverse warning buzzer can sound with the shift lever in the R posi-
to
tion only.
9. Check that the engine can be started with the shift lever in the P and N positions only.
r-s
10. The transmission is completely locked with the shift lever in the P position.
11. The shift position indicator of combination meter should change to the A range display or M range display
when the shift lever is operated to the M position.
t
.g
12. The shift position indicator in the combination meter should not change when each load of 30 N (3.1 kg) is
applied (pressed) to front and rear side at the shift lever in the P position, front side at the shift lever in the
w
R position, front side at the shift lever in the N position and rear side at the shift lever in the A position.
ADJUSTMENT
w
1. Disconnect the control cable from the control device assembly. Refer to TM-275, "Exploded View (GT-R
w

2. Shift the parking lever of transmission assembly to the P range
(A).
B : Other than P position

3. Rotate the wheels at least a quarter turn and the Park position
mechanism is fully engaged.
5. Install the socket of the control cable to the control device
assembly, and fix them with lock plate.
6. Insert the I-end bolt into the cable lever of the control device NNDIA0011ZZ
assembly, and apply the load of 9.8 N (1 kg) in the cable lever P
direction (toward vehicle front) to the control cable.
7. Release the control cable and temporarily tighten the lock nut. Then, tighten the lock nut to the specified
torque. Refer to TM-275, "Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
TM-268
FLY WHEEL HOUSING ASSEMBLY
A
Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020019
DESCRIPTION B
Check the flywheel housing assembly if the following symptom occurs on the vehicle. Replace the flywheel
housing assembly if any malfunctioning condition is detected.
• Noise from floor lower side C
• Vibration from floor lower side or whole vehicle
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Move the main propeller shaft upward/downward by hand to check the companion flange of the flywheel hous- TM
ing assembly for looseness. Measure the looseness of companion flange if there is any looseness.
Looseness (radial play) measurement of companion flange
1. Separate the main propeller shaft. Refer to XX-XX, "*****". E
2. Fix the dial gauge to the companion flange of the flywheel hous-
ing assembly, and then measure the looseness of companion
flange by moving the companion flange upward/downward. F
A : Measuring point
eu
G
Radial play
e.
Standard : Refer to TM-300, "Flywheel Housing As-
sembly (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". H
3.
r
Replace the flywheel housing assembly if the looseness of the
to
companion flange exceeds the standard. Refer to TM-293,
"Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)". I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
NNDIA0135ZZ
TM-269
TCM
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
TCM
Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020020
CAUTION:
from the malfunctioning TCM. For acquiring the IP characteristic data, refer to “CONSULT-III GT-R
• If no IP characteristic data can be extracted, TCM and the transmission assembly must be replaced
as a set.
eu
r e.
to
r-s
NNDIA0013GB
1. TCM
t
.g
Refer to XX-XX, "*****" in GI section for the symbols shown in the figure.
Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)

w
INFOID:0000000004020021
w
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
w
from the malfunctioning TCM. For acquiring the IP characteristic data, refer to “CONSULT-III GT-R
• If no IP characteristic data can be extracted, TCM and the transmission assembly must be replaced
as a set.
1. Disconnect battery cable from negative terminal.
2. Remove the trunk front finisher. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
3. Disconnect the TCM harness connector with the following procedure.
• Push the protrusion for fixing and fully open the levers (A) as
shown in the figure when disconnecting and connecting the
TCM harness connector.
1 : TCM
Direction B : Disconnect
Direction C : Connect
4. Remove the TCM mounting bolt.
5. Remove the TCM from the vehicle.
NNDIA0021ZZ
TM-270
TCM
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. A
CAUTION:
Refer to TM-258, "Precautions for Replacement of TCM and Transmission Assembly" when the TCM is
replaced. B
TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
TM-271
CONTROL DEVICE
CONTROL DEVICE
Exploded View INFOID:0000000004020022
eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
NNDIA0016GB
w
1. Shift lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Knob cover

4. Position indicator lamp 5. Slide cover 6. Slide plate
w
7. Control device assembly 8. Push-button ignition switch

w
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004020023
CAUTION:
Be careful of the following items because the range sensor is an important device to detect the shift
lever position.
• Keep range sensor (A) away from magnetic cards and mag-
netic objects during work.
• For a person with an electro-medical apparatus, keep the
range sensor away from the device.
• Keep foreign objects away from the opening (B) of range sen-
sor during work.
• Never touch the range sensor and sensor mounting screw.
• Always shift the shift lever to the P position during work.
NNDIA0001ZZ
REMOVAL
TM-272
CONTROL DEVICE
2. Lower the rear side of the knob cover (1) downward.
3. Pull out the lock pin (2) from the shift lever knob (3). A
4. Remove the shift lever knob and the knob cover.
5. Remove the console finisher assembly, instrument side panel
LH/RH, and center console assembly. Refer to XX-XX, "*****". B
6. Disconnect the control cable from the control device assembly.
Refer to TM-275, "Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN
dealer)". C
7. Disconnect the push-button ignition switch connector and the
range sensor connector, and remove the harness clip. NNDIA0126ZZ
8. Remove the control device assembly mounting bolt. TM

9. Remove the control device assembly from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Never place the control device assembly upside-down after removal. In addition, never place the E
range sensor side down.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. F
• Refer to “ADJUSTMENT” in TM-268, "Inspection and Adjustment" when installing the control cable to the
control device assembly.
• Note the following items when installing the shift lever knob.
eu
G
1. Install the lock pin (1) to the shift lever knob (2).
2. Install the knob cover (3) to the shift lever knob.
e.
3. Insert the shift lever knob into the shift lever until it clicks.
H
r
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
NNDIA0127ZZ
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000004020024

w
K
DISASSEMBLY
w
CAUTION:
Always shift the shift lever in the N position when performing disassembly and assembly of control L
w
device assembly.
1. Press the shift lock release button, and then shift the shift lever in the N position.
2. Insert a screwdriver into tabs (A: 4 locations), and remove the M
position indicator plate (1) from the control device assembly (2)
while lifting it up.
CAUTION: N
The tabs crack easily. Be careful when removing.
3. Remove the starter switch from the position indicator plate.
4. Remove the slide cover from the control device assembly. O
NNDIA0128ZZ P
Assembly
Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Align the convex area (A) of slide cover (1) with the convex area (B) of control device assembly (2) as shown
in the figure, and then install the position indicator plate. Check the shift lever movement after installation.
Assemble again if any malfunctioning condition is detected.
TM-273
CONTROL DEVICE
NNDIA0002ZZ
Inspection INFOID:0000000004020025
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

Check the shift position after installation. Adjust the shift position if any malfunctioning condition is detected.
eu
Refer to TM-268, "Inspection and Adjustment".
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-274
CONTROL CABLE
CONTROL CABLE
A
TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
w
L
w
NNDIA0010GB
N
1. Lock plate 2. Control device assembly 3. Control cable
4. Bracket A 5. Transmission assembly 6. Bracket B
7. Plain washer 8. Lock pin O
A. Retainer
: Apply multi-purpose grease or equivalent
Refer to XX-XX, "*****" in GI section for the symbols other than above. P
Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020027
CAUTION:
• Never twist the control cable.
• Never bend the control cable excessively. (Maintain a winding radius of 200 mm (7.87 in) dia. or
more.)
TM-275
CONTROL CABLE
• Never damage the boot and insulation of control cable.
• Always shift the shift lever to the P position during work.
REMOVAL
2. Remove the console finisher assembly, instrument side panel LH/RH, and center console assembly.
3. Disconnect the control cable from the control device assembly.
4. Separate the main propeller shaft assembly. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
5. Remove the retainer mounting bolt.
6. Lower down the transmission assembly from the vehicle. Refer to TM-291, "Exploded View (GT-R certi-
7. Disconnect the control cable from the parking brake lever of transmission assembly.
8. Disconnect the control cable from bracket A.
9. Disconnect the lock plate from bracket B.
10. Disconnect the control cable from the vehicle.
11. Remove bracket A and bracket B from the transmission assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
eu
• Connect the control cable to the parking brake lever of transmis-
sion assembly with the bushing flange (A) of control cable I-end
facing to the transmission side.
CAUTION:
Apply multi-purpose grease or equivalent to the pin of parking
lever at installation.
r e.
to
• Refer to “ADJUSTMENT” TM-268, "Inspection and Adjustment"
when installing the control cable to the control device assembly.
t r-s
NNDIA0130ZZ
.g

w

w
Check the shift position after installation. Adjust the shift position if any malfunctioning condition is detected.
Refer to TM-268, "Inspection and Adjustment".
w
TM-276
PADDLE SHIFTER
PADDLE SHIFTER
A
TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
JPDIA0051GB
1. Steering column assembly 2. Paddle shifter (shift-down switch) 3. Paddle shifter (shift-up switch) J
t
.g

w
REMOVAL
w
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. L

w
2. Remove the steering column cover. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".

NOTE:
Rotate the steering wheel until the mounting screw can be seen, and then remove the mounting screw.
M
TM-277
PADDLE SHIFTER
3. Disconnect the harness connectors (C) and (D) from the paddle
shifter.
A : Paddle shifter (shift-down switch)

B : Paddle shifter (shift-up switch)
4. Remove the bolt (E) and nut (F) from the paddle shifter.
NOTE:
Rotate the steering wheel until the mounting nut can be seen,
and then remove the mounting nut.
5. Remove the paddle shifter from the steering column assembly.
eu
JPDIA0052ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
r e.
to
r-s
t
.g
w
w
w
TM-278
OIL PAN
OIL PAN
A
TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
NNDIA0032GB
w
1. Transmission assembly 2. Oil pan gasket 3. Magnet K

4. Oil pan 5. Drain plug 6. Drain tube
w
L
w
REMOVAL M
2. Drain the transmission oil from the transmission assembly. Refer to TM-266, "Draining".
3. Remove the oil pan mounting bolt ( ), and then remove the oil N
pan (1) and oil pan gasket.
: Front of vehicle O
NNDIA0034ZZ
TM-279
OIL PAN
4. Remove the magnet (1) from the oil pan.
NNDIA0035ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Clean foreign matter (gear wear particles) that are adhered on the inside of the oil pan and on the
magnet, and then assemble.
• Completely wipe out any moisture, oil and old gasket from the gasket mounting surface.
• Never reuse oil pan gaskets.
• Never forget assembly of drain tube.
• Never reuse drain plug. In addition, install new drain plug after adjustment of transmission oil filling.
• When the oil pan is installed, tighten bolts in the order shown in the
eu
figure after temporarily tightening the oil pan mounting bolt.
: Front of vehicle
installation. Refer to TM-266, "Filling".

r e.
• Fill with the transmission oil to the transmission assembly after
to
r-s
NNDIA0036ZZ
t
Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)

.g
INFOID:0000000004020033

w
Check the transmission oil for leakage. Refer to TM-265, "Inspection".

w
w
TM-280
PARK POSITION SWITCH
A
TM
eu
G
NNDIA0038GB
e.
1. Park position switch 2. Plane washer 3. Transmission assembly
H
Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)

r
to
INFOID:0000000004020035
I
r-s
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery cable from negative terminal.
2. Remove the front diffuser. Refer to XX-XX, "*****". J
t
.g
4. Disconnect the park position switch connector (A).
w
K
5. Remove the park position switch (1).
w
L
w
NNDIA0039ZZ
N
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: O
• Never reuse plain washer.
• Securely remove dust on screws.
• Never use gasket fluid or thread locking agent to threads.
P
TM-281
• Install the park position switch with the parking lever in the P range
(A).
B : Other than the P position

NNDIA0011ZZ

• Check the transmission oil for leakage. Refer to TM-265, "Inspection".
• Check for continuity of park position switch. Refer to TM-67, "Component Inspection (Park Position Switch)
eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-282
HEAT EXCHANGER SYSTEM
A
HEAT EXCHANGER PIPING
HEAT EXCHANGER PIPING : Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)
INFOID:0000000004020037 B
TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
NNDIA0008GB
K
w
1. Clamp 2. Water hose A 3. Clips

4. Water hose B 5. Bracket 6. Insulator L
w
7. Collar 8. Water tube 9. Water hose C

10. Water hose D 11. Transmission assembly
A. To water outlet (rear) B. To heater pipe M
HEAT EXCHANGER PIPING : Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN deal- N
er) INFOID:0000000004020038
REMOVAL O
CAUTION:
Perform the operation when the engine is cold.
1. Remove the front diffuser. Refer to XX-XX, "*****". P
2. Remove the sub-muffler. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
4. Remove the water tube, water hose C and water hose D from the vehicle.
5. Remove the water outlet (rear) and heater pipe. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
6. Remove water hose A and water hose B from the water outlet (rear) and heater pipe.
7. Remove the clips from water hose A and water hose B.
TM-283
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse clamps.
• The clip is not reusable. Never reuse it.
• Never reuse insulators.
• Install the clips to water hose A (1) and water hose B (2) with the
paint mark (A) of hose in the direction shown in the figure.
: Front of vehicle
eu
r e.
to
NNDIA0065ZZ
r-s
• Refer to the following table when installing the water hose.

t
Direction of hose
.g
Hose end Direction of clamp

Water hose paint mark Hose insertion amount
(Paint shape / Color) tab
(Paint shape / Color)
w
Water outlet (rear) Rear of vehicle

Until it contacts a tube end Rear of vehicle
（— / —） ( / Green)
w
Water hose A
Water tube Right of vehicle Until it reaches the point where the winding ra-
Right of vehicle
w
(o / Green) (o / Green) dius stops

Heater pipe Upside of vehicle
Until it contacts a tube end Upside of vehicle
（— / —） ( / Yellow)
Water hose B
Water tube Right of vehicle Until it reaches the point where the winding ra-
Downside of vehicle
(o / Yellow) (o / Yellow) dius stops
Water tube Right of vehicle

(o / Green) ( / Pink)
Water hose C Right of vehicle
Heat exchanger Right of vehicle
（— / Green) (o / Pink)
Until the tube insertion indication stops
Water tube Right of vehicle
(o / Yellow) ( / Yellow)
Water hose D Right of vehicle
Heat exchanger Right of vehicle
（— / Blue) (o / Yellow)
• Fill with the coolant after installation. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".

HEAT EXCHANGER PIPING : Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020039

Check the following items.
TM-284
• Coolant leakage from the part removed and installed.
• Coolant amount. Refer to XX-XX, "*****". A
HEAT EXCHANGER
HEAT EXCHANGER : Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020040
B
TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
NNDIA0024GB J
t
.g
1. Spring washer 2. Plane washer 3. O-ring

4. Heat exchanger 5. Heat exchanger bracket 6. O-ring
w
K
7. O-ring 8. Transmission assembly
w
: Apply Genuine NISSAN Transmission oil R35 Special

Refer to XX-XX, "*****" in GI section for the symbols other than above. L
w
HEAT EXCHANGER : Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)

INFOID:0000000004020041
M
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Be careful because the heat exchanger unit and transmission oil are hot during work. N
1. Remove the main muffler. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
3. Remove water hose C and water hose D from the heat exchanger. Refer to TM-283, "HEAT O
EXCHANGER PIPING : Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
TM-285
4. Remove the heat exchanger (1).
: Bolt
NNDIA0028ZZ
5. Remove O-rings (1) and (2) from the heat exchanger.
eu
NNDIA0029ZZ
e.
6. Remove the heat exchanger bracket (1) from the transmission
assembly. r
to
: Bolt
t r-s
.g
NNDIA0030ZZ
w
7. Remove O-ring (1) from the heat exchanger bracket.

w
w
NNDIA0031ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse O-ring.
• Apply the transmission oil to O-ring when the O-ring is installed to the heat exchanger.
TM-286
• Temporally tighten the mounting bolt, and then tighten it to the
specified torque in the order shown in the figure when installing the A
heat exchanger bracket to the transmission assembly.
NNDIA0027ZZ
TM
• Install the heat exchanger so that the spring washer (1) is posi-
tioned as shown in the figure.
E
2 : Plane washer
CAUTION:
Never reuse spring washer. F
eu
G
NNDIA0025ZZ
e.
• Tighten the heat exchanger mounting bolt under the condition that
r
the heat exchanger is fitted with the stopper (A) of heat exchanger
H
to
bracket.
• Fill with the transmission oil to the transmission assembly after I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
K
NNDIA0026ZZ
w
HEAT EXCHANGER : Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020042
L
w

Check the transmission oil for leakage after installation. Refer to TM-265, "Inspection".
M
TM-287
FRONT OIL SEAL
FRONT OIL SEAL
eu
r e.
to
r-s
NNDIA0041GB
1. Companion flange 2. Front oil seal 3. Transmission assembly

t
: Apply anti-corrosion oil.

.g
: Check that the grease is applied to the lip and all inner walls of front oil seal. Apply multi-purpose grease or equivalent if the
w
grease is not applied. Refer to TM-288, "Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".
CAUTION:
w
Never use including extreme pressure additives.

Refer to XX-XX, "*****" in GI section for the symbols other than above.
w
REMOVAL
2. Remove the sub-muffler. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
4. Separate the front propeller shaft assembly. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
TM-288
FRONT OIL SEAL
6. Install the flange wrench (commercial service tool) (A) to the
companion flange of transfer, and then remove the mounting A
nut.
NNDIA0074ZZ
TM
7. Remove companion flange using a puller (commercial service
tool) (A).
CAUTION:
E
Never damage the companion flange.
eu
G
NNDIA0075ZZ
e.
8. Remove the front oil seal using the puller [SST: KV381054S0 (J-
H
34286)] (A). r
CAUTION:
to
Never damage case.
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
NNDIA0076ZZ
K
INSTALLATION
w

CAUTION: L
w
Apply anti-corrosion oil to threads and seat surfaces when installing the companion flange mounting
nut.
• Drive and install the front oil seal to the case end surface using a
drift. M
A : Drift [SST: ST30720000 (J-25405)]

B : Drift [SST: KV40104830 ( — )] N
CAUTION:
• Never reuse oil seals.
O
NNDIA0108ZZ
P
TM-289
FRONT OIL SEAL
• Check that the grease is applied to the lip and all inner walls
of oil seal. Apply multi-purpose grease or equivalent if the
grease is not applied.
- Never use including extreme pressure additives.
• Never incline the oil seal during installation.
• Never allow oil and dust, etc. to get on the oil seal press-fit-
ting surface.
• Never damage the oil seal.
• Never damage the front drive shaft when installing the oil
seal.
NOTE:
NNDIA0134ZZ
For OK/NG judgment of oil seal installation, measure the oil seal
press-fitting depth (on 2 locations or more) and check if they exceed the dimension “A”. Always calculate the
dimension “A” before measurement. Dimension “A” can be calculated by the formula below.
A = B − C − 0.5 mm (0.020 in)

A : Oil seal press-fitting depth
B : Case depth
C : Oil seal flange thickness
eu
e.
NNDIA0077ZZ
Inspection (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) r INFOID:0000000004020045

to
r-s
Check the transmission oil for leakage. Refer to TM-265, "Inspection".

t
.g
w
w
w
TM-290
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

B
TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
NNDIA0014GB K
w
1. Bracket 2. Mounting insulator 3. Transmission mounting stay

4. Bracket 5. Bracket 6. Transmission assembly L
w

M
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the transmission unit harness connector with the following procedure. N
• Rotate the bayonet ring (A) counterclockwise, and then pull
out the transmission unit harness connectors (B).
2. Remove the transmission assembly and rear suspension
O
assembly from the vehicle. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
3. Remove the air breather hose from the transmission assembly.
P
4. Remove the transmission assembly from the rear suspension
assembly. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
5. Remove the transmission mounting stay, mounting insulator,
and bracket. NNDIA0129ZZ
CAUTION:
• Never allow oil or grease to get on the mounting insulator. Never damage the tube.
TM-291
• Never use an impact wrench to remove the mounting insulator from the transmission mounting
stay.
6. Disconnect the rear cable. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Refer to TM-258, "Precautions for Replacement of TCM and Transmission Assembly" when the
transmission assembly is replaced.
• Never allow oil or grease to get on the mounting insulator. Never damage the tube.
• Never twist the rubber parts when installing the mounting insulator.
• Never use an impact wrench to install the insulator to the transmission mounting stay.
• Connect the transmission unit harness connector with the following procedure.
CAUTION:
Connect harness connectors between the connectors of the same color.
1. Align the marking (A) of transmission connector terminal unit
and the o marking (B) of bayonet ring, insert the transmission
unit harness connector, and then rotate the bayonet ring clock-
wise.
eu
r e. JPDIA0294ZZ
to
2. Rotate the bayonet ring clockwise until the marking (A) of
transmission connector terminal unit and the slit (B) of bayonet
r-s
ring are aligned as shown in the figure (specified joint condition),

and then connect the transmission unit harness connector to the
transmission connector terminal unit.
t
.g
w
w
JPDIA0295ZZ
w
NOTE:
• Securely align the positions of the marking (A) of transmission
connector terminal unit and the slit (B) of bayonet ring. In addition,
avoid the partial joint condition as shown in the figure.
• Do not confuse the bayonet ring slit with other dents.
JPDIA0296ZZ

Check the following items.
• Transmission oil leakage. Refer to TM-265, "Inspection".
• Check shift position. Adjust the shift position if necessary. Refer to TM-268, "Inspection and Adjustment".
TM-292
A
TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
NNDIA0007GB
1. Flywheel housing assembly 2. Heat insulator 3. Rear plate cover J

t
4. Heat insulator
.g
A. Refer to TM-293, "Removal and In- B. First step C. Second step

stallation (GT-R certified NISSAN
w
K
dealer)" for tightening torque.
w
Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) L

w
INFOID:0000000004020050
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine assembly from the vehicle. Refer to XX-XX, "*****". M
2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor 2 connector and harness from the heat insulator.
3. Remove the three-way catalyst (bank 1) and (bank 2) from the engine assembly. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
N
4. Remove the heat insulator from the flywheel housing assembly.
5. Remove the rear engine mounting insulator from the flywheel housing assembly. Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
6. Remove the starter motor. Refer to XX-XX, "*****". O
7. Remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to XX-XX, "*****".
CAUTION:
• Never subject it to impact by dropping. P
• Never disassemble the sensor.
• Check that metal powder does not adhere to magnetic area on top of sensor.
• Keep the sensor away from magnetic materials.
TM-293
8. Remove the rear plate cover (1) using a screwdriver (A).
CAUTION:
Never damage the flywheel housing assembly.
NNDIA0109ZZ
9. Rotate the crankshaft and remove the bolts ( : 6 places) that

secure the flywheel to drive line torsional vibration damper.
CAUTION:
Rotate crankshaft clockwise (as viewed from the front of
the engine).
10. Remove the mounting bolts of engine assembly and flywheel
housing assembly.
11. Remove the flywheel housing assembly from the engine assem-
bly.
eu
NNDIA0003ZZ
INSTALLATION
• Check if the knock pins (2 each) of cylinder block and flywheel are
r e.
to
not dropped, adjust the flywheel knock pin position so that it is
inserted into the knock pin insertion hole (convex shape) ( ) of
r-s
drive line torsional vibration damper, and install them.

t
.g
w
NNDIA0037ZZ
w
w
• Install the mounting bolts according to the standard below when

installing the flywheel housing assembly to the engine assembly.
A B C
Bolt symbol (Housing side → (Housing side → (Engine side →
Engine side) Engine side) Housing side)
Quantity 4 3 4
Nominal length
65 (2.56) 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57)
mm (in)
Tightening torque
75 (7.7, 55) 34 (3.5, 25) 65 (6.6, 48) NNDIA0004ZZ
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
TM-294
• Tighten the bolts of flywheel and drive line torsional vibration
damper evenly in 2 steps as shown in the figure after temporarily A
tightening the bolt. The figure shows the view from the rear of the
vehicle.
B
A : First step
B : Second step
C : Knock pin
C
CAUTION:
• Rotate crankshaft clockwise (as viewed from the front of the
engine).
• Check the tightening torque for crankshaft pulley mounting TM
bolts after drive line torsional vibration damper bolts are
tightened and crankshaft pulley mounting bolts are secured.
E
eu
G
NNDIA0005ZZ
e.
• Press the tabs (B) into the flywheel housing assembly after insert-
ing the tabs (A) into the flywheel housing assembly when installing
r
the rear plate cover. The figure shows the view from the top of the
H
to
vehicle.
CAUTION: I
r-s
• Never reuse rear plate cover.

• Check for installation direction.
• Press surrounding area of tabs (B) when pressing the tabs J
t
(B) in.
.g
• Never tap the cover when installing.

• Check cover unit for excessive looseness and surrounding
w
embossment.
NNDIA0110ZZ
K
w
L
w
TM-295
• Temporally tighten the mounting bolt, and then tighten it to the
specified torque in the order shown in the figure when installing the
heat insulator to the flywheel housing assembly.
eu
NNDIA0006ZZ
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-296
< DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY A

B
TM
eu
G
r e. H
to
I
r-s
J
t
.g
w
NNDIA0040GB K
w
1. Transmission assembly 2. Filler plug 3. Filler plug gasket

4. 3rd-5th check pin 5. Plane washer 6. O-ring L
w
7. Plug 8. Idler bolt 9. Plane washer

: Apply Genuine NISSAN Transmission oil R35 Special.
Refer to XX-XX, "*****" in GI section for the symbols other than above.
M
Disassembly and assembly (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020052
N
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
For any parts other than filler plug, remove and replace only when a trace of oil leakage is detected. O
Be careful of the following items when removing the component parts.
• Drain the transmission oil before removing the 3rd-5th check pin. Refer to TM-266, "Draining".
• Stop the engine with the shift lever in the P position before removing the 3rd-5th check pin.
P
ASSEMBLY
Be careful of the following items when installing the component parts.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse filler plug gasket.
• Never reuse plain washer.
• Never reuse O-ring.
• Apply the transmission oil when installing the O-ring.
TM-297
< DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
• Temporarily tighten by hand, and then tighten to the specified torque when installing the parts to the
transmission assembly.
• Fill with the transmission oil after installation. Refer to TM-266, "Filling".
eu
r e.
to
t r-s
.g
w
w
w
TM-298
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

General Specification INFOID:0000000004020053
B
VR38DETT
Applied model C
AWD
Transmission model GR6Z30A
Transmission model code number(*1) JF00A TM

Operating system Remote control floor shifter and paddle shifter
P Fixed to output shaft (engine start is possible)
E
R Reverse
N Neutral (engine start is possible)
R 1←→2←→3←→4←→5←→6 F
A Normal 1←→2←→3←→4←→5←→6
SNOW 1←→2←→3←→4←→5←→6
eu
M
G
6 Fixed to 6th gear
5M Fixed to 5th gear
Shift position R
4M
3M
r e.
Fixed to 4th gear
Fixed to 3rd gear

With the under rev protection au-
tomatic shift function
H
to
2M Fixed to 2nd gear I
r-s
1M Fixed to 1st gear

M
6M Fixed to 6th gear
J
t
5M
.g
Fixed to 5th gear
Transmission 4M Fixed to 4th gear With the over rev and under rev
w
Normal
protection automatic shift function
K
3M Fixed to 3rd gear
w
2M Fixed to 2nd gear

L
w
1M Fixed to 1st gear

1st gear 4.056
2nd gear 2.301 M
3rd gear 1.595
Gear ratio 4th gear 1.248
5th gear 1.001 N
6th gear 0.796
Reverse 3.383
O
Control system Electronic controls
Self-diagnosis function With
Function
Fail safe function With P
Synchronizer system Borg Warner type triple cone synchronizer
Type External gear pump
Oil pump
Drive type Drive with the engine
Recommended Genuine NISSAN Transmission oil R35 Special
Oil
Capacity 9.7 liter (10-1/4 US qt, 8-1/2 Imp qt)(*2)
TM-299
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [TRANSMISSION: GR6Z30A]
• *1: The model No. refers to the lower five digits of the part number (32000 XXXXX).
• *2: The indicated oil level is only a guide, therefore check the oil level according to the Service Manual.
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)
INFOID:0000000004020054
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Gear position
Accelerator pedal position 4.0/8 Accelerator pedal position 8.0/8
A1 → A2 41 – 45 (25 – 28) 51 – 55 (31 – 35)
A2 → A3 73 – 79 (45 – 50) 96 – 104 (59 – 65)
UP A3 → A4 101 – 109 (62 – 68) 141 – 151 (87 – 94)
A4 → A5 127 – 135 (78 – 84) 184 – 194 (114 – 121)
A5 → A6 156 – 164 (96 – 102) 231 – 241 (143 – 150)
A6 → A5 124 – 132 (77 – 83) 170 – 180 (105 – 112)
A5 → A4 84 – 92 (52 – 58) 125 – 135 (77 – 84)
DOWN A4 → A3 41 – 49 (25 – 31) 76 – 86 (47 – 54)
A3 → A2 30 – 36 (18 – 23) 39 – 47 (24 – 30)
A2 → A1 0 (0) 0 (0)
eu
Solenoid Valve (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020055

r e. Resistance (Approx.)
to
Items Transmission oil Transmission oil Transmission oil
Connector Terminal temperature temperature temperature
r-s
20°C (68°F) 50°C (122°F) 80°C (176°F)

Shift solenoid valve 1 13
Shift solenoid valve 2 20
t
.g
Shift solenoid valve 3 27 Ground 6.6 – 7.4 Ω 7.3 – 8.3 Ω 8.1 – 9.2 Ω
Shift solenoid valve 4 B49 7
w
Sequence solenoid valve 6

w
Axis A feed pressure solenoid valve 14 15

3.8 – 4.4 Ω 4.3 – 5.0 Ω 4.7 – 5.4 Ω
Axis B feed pressure solenoid valve 21 22
w
Clutch A solenoid valve 37 38

4.6 – 5.0 Ω 5.1 – 5.6 Ω 5.6 – 6.2 Ω
Clutch B solenoid valve 42 43
B50
Line pressure solenoid valve 48 49
3.8 – 4.4 Ω 4.3 – 5.0 Ω 4.7 – 5.4 Ω
Lubricating flow solenoid valve 54 55
Fluid Temperature Sensor (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020056
Transmission unit harness connector Resistance (Approx.)
Items Transmission oil Transmission oil Transmission oil

Connector Terminal temperature temperature temperature
20°C (68°F) 50°C (122°F) 80°C (176°F)
Fluid temperature sensor B50 45 46 6.36 – 6.68 kΩ 2.17 – 2.23 kΩ 0.86 – 0.89 kΩ
Flywheel Housing Assembly (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) INFOID:0000000004020057
Unit: mm (in)
Radial play 0 – 0.55 (0 – 0.0217)
TM-300

TM Transmission GTR Store PDF

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

TM Transmission GTR Store PDF

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION

TCM REPLACEMENT : Description ......................... 8 P0700 TCM ........................................................ 58

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT ........ 9 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN

Description (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) ...........62

MAINTENANCE ......................................................... 11 Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN

P0729 SLEEVE A1 FUNCTION ......................... 91

P0731 SLEEVE B1 FUNCTION ......................... 99

dealer) ................................................................... 141

Diagnosis Procedure (GT-R certified NISSAN

DTC Logic (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .......... 144

Component Inspection (Auto/Manual Range

MAIN POWER SUPPLY .................................. 194 ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................. 265

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .................................... 200 TCM .................................................................. 270

ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 205 e.

Reference Value (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)..205

Fail Safe (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer) .............230

DTC Index .............................................................233 Removal and Installation (GT-R certified NISSAN

dealer) ................................................................... 277

TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM ........... 235

1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM

No malfunction information, but DTC exists.>>GO TO 5.

blinking, on the vehicle.

fied NISSAN dealer)".

nostic Work Sheet (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)".

the customer occurs.

erly, a quick and exact diagnosis can be performed.

In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. There-

the interview sheet referring to the interview points.

the transmission warning light blink, which causes a DTC to be

When TCM is replaced, learning must be performed.

certified NISSAN dealer)".

3.SET LEARNING CONDITION

1. Start the engine.

5.CHECK THE LEARNING CONDITION A

7.PERFORM “ACTIVE TEST” (CLUTCH B SOLENOID)

When the transmission assembly is replaced, the learning must be performed. O

7.PERFORM “ERASE CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT PRESSURE CORRECTION VALUE”

VEHICLE SPEED : 3.5 km/h (2 MPH) or less

YES >> GO TO 11.

2. Select “CLUTCH A PRESS”, and “TGT CLUTCH A PRS”.

1.PREPARE BEFORE LEARNING

1. Perform “CLUTCH GEAR LEARNING” in “Work support”.

Is the learning condition fulfilled?

13. 5th gear 14. Reverse gear 15. 1st gear

16. 4th gear 17. 2nd gear 18. 6th gear

13. 5th gear 14. Reverse gear 15. 1st gear

16. 4th gear 17. 2nd gear 18. 6th gear K

13. 5th gear 14. Reverse gear 15. 1st gear

16. 4th gear 17. 2nd gear 18. 6th gear

Shift Mechanism (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)

2. Pre-shift (3rd gear)

4. Running with 3rd gear

Main Device (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)

7. 3rd-5th shift fork 8. 3rd gear 9. Sleeve B2

16. 2nd gear

A. 6th gear B. 2nd gear C. 4th gear

1. Parking gear 2. Parking pawl 3. Parking rod

1. Parking gear 2. Parking pawl 3. Parking rod

1. Parking gear 2. Parking pawl 3. Parking rod

SHIFT LOCK DEVICE

1. Plate 2. Detent pin 3. Slider A

1. Plate 2. Detent pin 3. Slider A